JP6856062B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that the player is made to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a combination lottery execution means for executing a combination lottery process and a combination lottery execution means.
Winning correspondence granting means for granting winning correspondence privilege corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process,
A transition lottery execution means for executing a transition lottery process when a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process in the pre-transition state, and
An advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state when the transition is won in the transition lottery process.
A means for increasing the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process, provided that at least one condition is that the winning combination is won in the combination lottery process in the pre-transition state.
With
The separate combination does not serve as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but serves as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in other gaming states .
The predetermined combination serves as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but does not serve as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in other gaming states.
At least in the pre-transition state, the probability of winning the predetermined combination is higher than the probability of winning the other combination.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the stop symbol at the time of each winning (a)-(g) occurrence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the stop symbol at the time of each winning (a)-(g) occurrence. It is a front view of (a) the acquired number display unit and the internal state notification unit, (b) a front view of the privilege point notification unit and the stock notification unit, and (c) a front view of the victory number notification unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a non-internal state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for an internal rear state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CB state processing executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of transition of the gaming state which occurs under the control of the main MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the light emission control mode of an internal state notification part. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st weight setting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd weight setting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus AT management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the state when the 1st special replay is won or missed in the state after the inside of CB. It is a timing chart which shows the state when the 2nd special replay win or the 3rd special replay win in the state after the inside of CB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the CB middle state and the bonus AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the standby effect setting process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for CB executed in the sub-side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transition mode from a non-AT state to an AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the non-AT processing executed by the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition chance management process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the transition chance executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling game management process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each game state included in AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process in AT which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state before branch which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st addition process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition state executed in the sub-side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing executed by the sub-side MPU, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the stock notification table. (A) It is a timing chart for explaining how privilege points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the pre-branch AT state, and (B1) to (B4) light emitting modes of the privilege point notification unit and the stock notification unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the branch AT state executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for branch AT state executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd addition process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the termination process of the branch AT state executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pre-branch AT state executed by the sub-side MPU. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the progress mode of the branched AT state, and is a diagram simply showing the contents of the battle effect in the (B1) to (B6) image display devices. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the AT continuation probability in the AT continuation lottery process is promoted. It is a timing chart which shows the transition timing to the addition state in the branch AT state and the branch AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition state executed in the sub-side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) the addition mode of the addition state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the privilege point counter. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a final chance executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus AT executed in the sub-side MPU. (A) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline of the electric structure of the game hall where a lot of slot machines are installed, and (b) is the front view of the external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the end which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bell winning determination process executed in the main MPU. It is a timing chart which shows how the output state of an AT1 signal is changed in relation to the role of a bell. It is a flowchart which shows the normal replay push order determination process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the start which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for normal replay executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the push order avoidance processing executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows how the output mode of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay combination. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process before the start executed in the main MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of the AT1 signal and AT2 signal in the case of shifting to a normal AT state with a bonus AT state as an opportunity. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of the AT1 signal and AT2 signal at the time of transitioning to a bonus AT state in the middle of a normal AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the AT1 signal and AT2 signal executed by the main MPU in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the final chance state executed in the sub-side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the termination process of the normal AT state executed in the sub-side MPU in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a kind of a game machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

Each of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while the medal is being inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state in which they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal is awarded. And until the execution of various processes such as the management of the game state is completed, it corresponds to one game.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 when the insertion is possible by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12, and when the insertion is not possible, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of medals is established on the effective line. There is.

Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 58 as a real medal.

As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power button 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting states of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". It includes a setting key insertion hole 57, which is operated to change within the range of "setting 6".

<Designs attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 3 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible to the main control device 70 from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay 1" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), and a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L). "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (for example, 11th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "cherry" There are nine types of symbols (for example, the ninth of the left reel 32L), the "replay 3" symbol (for example, the sixth of the left reel 32L), and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of medals bet and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the privilege of paying out the medals, the replay Either the privilege of "" or the privilege of transitioning the gaming state is given.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a bending line, not as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are combined. Sub-line SL2 connecting the connected sub-line SL2 and the middle design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M and the middle design of the right reel 32R, the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R On the line extending in a straight line, such as the sub line SL4 connecting the lower symbols, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the sub line SL5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R, the symbols to be won will be awarded. Even if the combination is established, the prize is not established. The number of main lines is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four, or five or more. In such a configuration in which a plurality of main lines are set, depending on the number of bets. The number of main lines to be activated may be different. Further, the main line is not limited to a bent line, and may be a line extending in a straight line.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won, and FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (g) and 7 are. (A) to FIG. 7 (g) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of the stop symbol when each winning is generated.

The small winning combination prizes for which medals are paid out include the 1st to 12th supplementary prizes, the 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, the 1st watermelon prize, and the 2nd watermelon prize.

Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is. One of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol. If, it will be one of the 1st supplementary prize to the 9th supplementary prize. In addition, if the "Red 7" symbol, "Bell" symbol, and "Bell" symbol stop from the left on the main line ML, the 10th supplementary prize will be awarded, and the "BAR" symbol, "Bell" symbol from the left on the main line ML. And, if the "bell" symbol is stopped, the 11th supplementary prize will be awarded, and if the "watermelon" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol are stopped from the left in the main line ML, the 12th supplementary prize will be awarded. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the twelfth supplementary prize, one medal is paid out when three bets are made, and two medals are paid out when two bets are made.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol, or the "replay 3" symbol, and the right. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first bell is won. If the first bell is won, four medals will be paid out if three bets are made, and two medals will be paid out if two bets are made.

When the first bell is won, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the lower subline SL4 are "bell" symbols. The player can easily recognize that the winning is established when the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed on a straight line. In this case, by stopping and displaying the combination of the same "bell" symbols at the time of winning the first bell, it is easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of the winning in the configuration aimed at diversifying the winning formation mode in the main line ML. It becomes possible.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. If either is the case, the second bell will be won. If the second bell is won, 9 medals will be paid out when 3 bets are made, and 2 medals will be paid out when 2 bets are made.

In the case of winning the second bell, as shown in FIG. 6B, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upward-sloping subline SL5 are the "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell is won is the sub line SL5, which is different from the sub line SL4 in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first bell winning and the second bell winning for the player who determines whether or not the winning is present depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the right. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon wins. In the case of the first watermelon winning, four medals are paid out when three bets are made, and two medals are paid out when two bets are made.

In the case of winning the first watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6C, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the downward-sloping subline SL1 can be "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combination of "watermelon" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol passes through the upper, middle or lower stage, the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed on the sub line SL1 when the first watermelon is won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "BAR" symbol or the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol. If it is a "watermelon" pattern, it will be the second watermelon prize. In the case of the second watermelon winning, four medals are paid out when three bets are made, and two medals are paid out when two bets are made.

In the case of winning the second watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6D, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower sub-line SL4 are “watermelon” symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second watermelon is won is the sub line SL4, which is different from the sub line SL1 in which the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first watermelon is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first watermelon winning and the second watermelon winning for the player who determines whether or not the winning is present depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

Normal replay prize, 1st bell replay prize, 2nd bell replay prize, 1st as prizes that are given the privilege of replay that allows the next game to be played without betting medals (or virtual medals). There are cherry replay prize, second cherry replay prize, first special replay prize, second special replay prize, first special replay prize, second special replay prize and third special replay prize.

Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is. If it is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol, and "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "White 7" symbol or the "Watermelon" symbol, the normal replay prize is won. It becomes.

In the case of a normal replay prize, as shown in FIG. 6 (e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle subline SL3 are the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol, and the "replay 3". It becomes one of the symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the normal replay prize has been won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol. If the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the first bell replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the first bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first bell replay prize has been won. In addition, the line where the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell replay is won is the sub line SL2, and when the first bell is won, the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the sub line SL4 and the second bell are won. This is different from the sub-line SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first bell replay winning from the first bell winning and the second bell winning for the player who judges whether or not the winning is present based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It will be possible.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol, the second bell replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the second bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (g), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle sub-line SL3 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell replay has been won. In addition, the line where the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell replay is won is the sub line SL3, and when the first bell is won, the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the sub line SL4 and the second bell are won. It is different from the sub-line SL5 in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed, and the sub-line SL2 in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell replay is won. Due to such a difference, the second bell replay prize is changed to the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and the first bell replay prize for the player who judges whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to distinguish them.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol. And if it is one of the "watermelon" symbols, it will be the first cherry replay prize.

In the case of the first cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the downward-sloping subline SL1 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 attempts to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "cherry" symbol, the two "cherry" symbols or the three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL1. Can be displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol, or the "replay 3" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the second cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7B, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second cherry replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 attempts to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "cherry" symbol, the two "cherry" symbols or the three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL2. Can be displayed. Further, the line in which the combination of the "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second cherry replay is won is the sub line SL2, which is different from the sub line SL1 in which the combination of the "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first cherry replay is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning for the player who determines whether or not the winning is present depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 1" symbol. If it is either a "2" symbol or a "replay 3" symbol, it will be the first special replay prize. The stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary with respect to whether or not the first special replay prize is awarded.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay 1" symbol, "replay 2". If it is either a symbol or a "replay 3" symbol, it will be a second special replay prize.

When the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay prize is awarded. The stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary with respect to whether or not the first special replay prize is awarded.

When the first special replay prize is awarded, as shown in FIG. 7C, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all "white 7" symbols in each of the downward-sloping subline SL1 and the upward-sloping subline SL5. Can be. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "white 7" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "white 7" symbol, three "white 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. It should be noted that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay winning is not won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "white 7" symbol or the "replay 1" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is. If it is a "white 7" symbol, it will be the second special replay prize.

In the case of the second special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7D, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 can be "white 7" symbols. In addition to this, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the lower subline SL4 can all be "white 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "white 7" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second special replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "white 7" symbol, three "white 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL2. Further, the line in which the combination of the "white 7" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second special replay prize is won is the sub line SL2 or the sub line SL4, and the sub line SL1 in which the combination of the "white 7" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first special replay prize is won. And subline SL5. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning for the player who determines whether or not the winning is present depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the second special replay winning is not won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, or the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the right reel. If the stop symbol of 32R is the "Red 7" symbol, the third special replay prize will be awarded.

In the case of the third special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 can be the "red 7" symbol. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the third special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "Red 7" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the third special replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "Red 7" symbol, three "Red 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL4. It should be noted that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the third special replay winning is not won.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, it is possible to play the next game without betting on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the game of the next game can be started in the state of three bets while eliminating the need for betting on both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible. In addition, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which two medals are bet, it is possible to start the game of the next game in the state of two bets while eliminating the need for betting on both medals and virtual medals. ..

There is a CB (Challenge Bonus) prize as a state transition prize in which only the transition of the game state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. If there is, it will be a CB prize. When the CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

The CB state is a gaming state in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped in the main line ML, the medal is paid out as the winning combination is established regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination. For example, even if "1" is not set in the winning flag corresponding to the first bell prize, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell prize stops on the main line ML, the first bell prize is won. The number of medals corresponding to is given to the player. On the other hand, the replay prize is established on the condition that the corresponding role is won in the lottery.

In the CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state, which is not the CB state, is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed until a specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the CB state, the reel control is performed on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the reel control is not performed on the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control is performed in which the left stop button 42 is operated and then the reel is slid only up to one symbol. In other words, in the CB game state, it can be said that the reel control for stopping the left reel 32L until a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated is performed.

In the CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is prioritized, and if the replay winning is not possible, one of the small winning combination is generated at 100%. In addition, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is not won, one of the small winning combination prizes will be generated at 100%. In this case, in the CB state, the number of bets in each game is set to two. As described above, when the number of bets is two, the number of medals to be paid out will be two regardless of which small winning combination is established. Therefore, in the CB state, only two medals are paid out when the small winning combination is established. If the replay prize is established in the CB state, the number of bets in the next game will be two. Therefore, in the CB state, either two medals are paid out or a replay in the two-card bet state occurs in each game in which two medals are bet, and in the CB state, the number of medals owned by the player increases or decreases. do not. The CB state ends when a small winning combination is awarded 19 times.

In the CB game, the reel control that slides only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button slides only up to one symbol. May be performed, and reel control may be performed in which only a predetermined reel is slipped by a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, the stop buttons operated in a certain order, such as reel control that slides only up to one symbol for the reel corresponding to the second operated stop button or the last operated stop button. Reel control may be performed so that only one symbol can be slipped on the reel corresponding to the above.

As described above, there are small winning combination winnings, replay winnings, and CB winnings as the winning modes, but the lottery results of the internal lottery include outliers in which all of these winnings cannot occur. Then, when the result is off, as shown in FIG. 7 (f), the combination of the "white 7" symbols can be stopped on the sub-line SL3 in the middle stage, and as shown in FIG. 7 (g), the combination of the symbols can be stopped. The combination of "Red 7" symbols may stop on the middle sub-line SL3. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the result of the deviation has occurred. However, if the result is out of the question, the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the above prizes will not be stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In addition, since the line in which the combination of "white 7" symbols or the combination of "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the case of an off result is the sub line SL3, the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, and the third special In the case of a replay prize, the combination of "white 7" symbols or the combination of "red 7" symbols is different from the subline that is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, for the player who judges whether or not there is a prize based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed, the result of the loss is the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, and the third special replay prize. It is possible to distinguish between them.

<Device for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, a credit display unit 61 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored and the number of medals won at the time of winning are displayed at positions below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. The acquired number display unit 62 is provided respectively. These display units 61 and 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired number display unit 62 is provided with an internal state notification unit 63 in addition to the segment light emitting unit 62a for displaying the acquired number. The internal state notification unit 63 uses a monochromatic light emitting type LED having a display color different from that of the segment light emitting unit 62a. Further, on the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, the segment light emitting unit 62a is arranged on the center side, whereas the internal state notification unit 63 is arranged on the corner side of the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62. There is.

The internal state notification unit 63 is a display unit for notifying that the CB combination has been won. When a CB role is won, unlike other winning roles, the winning state of the CB role is carried over until the CB winning is established in the main line ML, and the winning state of the CB role is canceled when the CB winning is established. .. In this case, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as a non-internal notification mode when the CB combination is not won or in the CB state, and as an internal notification mode when the CB combination is won. It is lit. This lighting state is a state in which the lighting is maintained, but instead of this, a configuration may be configured in which the lighting is blinked at a predetermined cycle.

By providing the internal state notification unit 63, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the CB combination has been won. Further, the segment light emitting unit 62a of the acquired number display unit 62 is turned on when a medal or a virtual medal is given at the end of one game, is turned off at the start of the next game, and is turned off. Will be maintained until a new small win is established. Therefore, in a configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is arranged in the acquired number display unit 62 so as not to be too conspicuous for the player, the acquired number display unit 62 is used in the situation where the CB role is won. It is possible to positively generate a situation in which only the internal state notification unit 63 is lit, and the manager of the game hall can easily check the internal state notification unit 63. The effect of facilitating such confirmation can also be achieved by the fact that the internal state notification unit 63 has a light emitting color different from that of the segment light emitting unit 62a.

In addition, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the segment light emitting unit of the credit display unit 61 and the acquired number display unit 62, and the internal state notification unit 63. Even in this case, by setting the internal state notification unit 63 within the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of the internal state notification unit 63.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 64 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 65 and an image display device 66 such as a liquid crystal display device that gives various information to the player are provided.

A privilege point notification unit 67 and a stock notification unit 68 are provided below the image display device 66, and a victory number notification unit 69 is provided on the right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R in the game panel 20. Has been done.

FIG. 8B is a front view of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. As will be described in detail later, when a player wins a predetermined role in the normal AT (assist time) state and wins in the privilege point lottery process, privilege points are added, and the accumulated points are determined as reference points. When the score is 7 points, the number of sets in the normal AT state is added once and the state shifts to the additional state.

The privilege point notification unit 67 is for notifying the number of the remainder when the remainder when the number of privilege points is divided by 7 is 1 or more. The privilege point notification unit 67 is provided with 7 × 2 unit point display units 67a using single-color light emitting type LEDs, and these unit point display units 67a are left and right so as to sandwich the stock notification unit 68 in between. They are evenly distributed. Seven unit point display units 67a are provided in each of the pair of left and right display areas. For example, when the number of privilege points is "1", one of the outermost ones in each of the pair of left and right display areas. The unit point display unit 67a is lit. For example, when the number of privilege points is "5", the unit point display unit 67a for five units from the outside is lit in each pair of left and right display areas.

The stock notification unit 68 is for notifying the number of quotients when the number of privilege points is divided by 7 and the quotient is 1 or more. A multi-color light emitting type LED is used in the stock notification unit 68, and the number of stocks in the normal AT state is notified by the light emitting color.

FIG. 8C is a front view of the winning number notification unit 69. As will be described in detail later, the normal AT state includes a pre-branch AT state and a branch AT state, and in the branch AT state shifted after the pre-branch AT state, the image display device 66 performs a battle effect. Then, when the normal AT state continues, as the battle effect, a victory effect of the ally side character or a draw effect between the ally side character and the enemy side character is performed, and when the normal AT state does not continue, the normal AT state does not continue. As the battle effect, the defeat effect of the ally character is performed. Then, when the winning effect of a predetermined number of executions is executed in a series of normal AT states, the winning probability in the continuous lottery in the normal AT state is set to the highest probability.

The winning number display unit 69 is for notifying the number of times the winning effect is executed in a series of normal AT states. The winning number display unit 69 is provided with twelve unit winning number display units 69a using a single-color light emitting type LED, which is a number corresponding to a predetermined number of executions, and these unit winning number display units 69a have an outer edge. They are arranged in a circular shape. For example, when the number of win effects in a series of normal AT states is one, one unit win number display unit 69a is lit. For example, in the case of five times, five consecutive unit win number displays are displayed. The unit 69a is turned on.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main substrate, and the main substrate is housed in a substrate box as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. These box bases and box covers are non-openably fastened by a fastening unit. When opening the board box, it is necessary to release the fastened state, and a broken portion will occur when the fastened state is released. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to simply confirm whether or not the board box has been opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70. The sub control device 80 is arranged so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 66 at the front door 12. The sub control device 80 controls the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, the image display device 66, the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the victory number notification unit 69 based on the command received from the main control device 70. .. In the sub control device 80, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 70.

<Electrical configuration of slot machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there are a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and each. Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49. Credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operation of the payment detection sensor 51a, the payment detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the payment button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, and the reset detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the reset button 56. , Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 57a for detecting that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

On the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a credit display unit 61, an acquired number display unit 62, an internal state. The notification unit 63, the sub control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72, and when the small winning combination winning is established and the medal is paid out, the drive control of the hopper device 53 is the MPU 72. Is done by. Further, the display control of the credit display unit 61, the acquired number display unit 62, and the internal state notification unit 63 is directly executed by the MPU 72 without going through another control device. A command is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub control device 80 at each timing of each game.

Further, an external terminal plate 90 is provided on the output side of the MPU 72. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 90 is provided adjacent to the main control device 70 on the back plate of the housing 11. Although the details will be described later, the MPU 72 externally outputs various signals corresponding to the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall through the external terminal board 90.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The sub control device 80 includes a sub control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various effects. The MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in.

It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 84 is supplied with backup power from the power supply unit during power failure of the power supply device 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, and the backup power is supplied (for example, one day). And 2 days), the data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 84 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and various commands are received from the MPU 72.

An upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, an image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67, a stock notification unit 68, and a victory number notification unit 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. In the MPU 82, based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the light emission control of the upper lamp 64, the sound output control of the speaker 65, the display control of the image display device 66, the light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67, and the stock notification unit. By executing the light emission control of 68 and the light emission control of the winning number notification unit 69, various notifications and various effects are performed.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the sub control device 80 are referred to as the sub side, respectively. It is referred to as MPU 82, sub-side ROM 83, and sub-side RAM 84.

<Processes executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82>
Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of the basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

The processing of the main MPU 72 is roughly divided into a normal processing that is repeatedly executed after the main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started by interrupting the normal processing periodically. Yes, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then the normal processing will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

In the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S106, a stepping motor control process for driving each stepping motor is performed in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the sub control device 80 is performed. In step S111, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. After that, in step S113, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the sub-control device 80 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the sub control device 80 or the like is completed, the process proceeds to steps S203 to S219.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the wait time before the start set in the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time before the start has not elapsed, the process of step S203 is executed again, and if the wait time before the start has elapsed, the start wait process is executed in step S204. If the wait time before the start is set, the measurement of the wait time is started once a negative determination is made in step S203. If the wait time is not set, the process proceeds to step S204 as it is.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay prizes has occurred, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. If none of the replay prizes have occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 is operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Process the medal return process. Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement button 51 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number (“3” or “2” in the present embodiment), and the number of bets has not reached the specified number. In that case, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206. In the external output setting process, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC are performed through the external terminal board 90. After that, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated.

If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204. On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, after activating the main line ML, betting acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 in step S208. After that, in step S209, the lottery process for drawing the winning combination in this game is executed, and in step S210, various settings for externally outputting to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Executes the external output setting process at the start of. Then, in step S211 it is determined whether or not the freeze time set in the lottery process of step S209 has elapsed. If the freeze time has not elapsed, the process of step S211 is executed again, and if the freeze time has elapsed, the processes of step S212 and subsequent steps are executed. When the freeze time is set, the measurement of the freeze time is started once a negative determination is made in step S211. If the freeze time is not set, the process proceeds directly to step S212 and subsequent steps.

In step S212, a reel control process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. After that, in step S213, the medal payout process is executed. In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If so, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that a number of medals exceeding the maximum value are paid out to the medal tray 59.

After that, in step S214, the CB state process for controlling the CB state is executed, in step S215, the bonus AT management process for controlling the bonus AT (assist time) state is executed, and further in step S216. Then, the external output setting process at the end for making various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 90 is executed.

After that, in step S217, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S217, the process returns to step S201 as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S217, it is determined in step S218 whether or not the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has not elapsed, the process of step S218 is executed again, and if the wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219, and then the process returns to step S201. When the wait time is set, the measurement of the wait time is started once a negative determination is made in step S218. If the wait time is not set, the process proceeds to step S219 as it is.

Hereinafter, the lottery process in step S209, the reel control process in step S212, the CB state process in step S214, and the bonus AT management process in step S215 will be described in detail. The external output setting processes of steps S206, S210, and S216 will be described in detail after the flow of the game has been described.

<Lottery process>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the lottery process of step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73. In the slot machine 10, there are three types of gaming states in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72: a CB non-internal state, a CB internal rear state, and a CB middle state. In step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the content of the flag corresponding to the gaming state provided in the main RAM 74, and the lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is selected. Specifically, when the current gaming state is the CB non-internal state, the non-internal state lottery table is selected, and when the current gaming state is the CB internal rear state, the internal rear state lottery table is selected. Select, and if the current gaming state is the CB state, select the CB state lottery table.

Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. The lottery table for the internal rear state is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the six-step setting state. In step S302, the internal rear state in which the expected value of medal payout is the lowest when the setting state is "setting 1". Select the lottery table for internal use, and select the lottery table for internal rear state with the highest expected value of medal payout at the time of "setting 6". On the other hand, only one type of the lottery table for the non-internal state and the lottery table for the CB is prepared so as to be common to all the setting states.

Each lottery table will be described. First, the lottery table for the non-internal state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for non-internal state, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. .. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

Specifically, in IV = 1, the second bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any one of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize can be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur.

In IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur.

In IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the seventh supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the second. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize can be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize may occur.

In IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the seventh supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the second. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize can be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize may occur.

At IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the eighth supplementary winning data. Compensation winning data and ninth compensation winning data are set. When winning at IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, any one of the 1st supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 8th supplementary prize and the 9th supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this omission will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1-4.

At IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the eighth Compensation winning data and ninth compensation winning data are set. When winning with IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, any of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this omission will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1-4.

At IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 13, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth supplementary winning data, the eleventh supplementary winning data, and the twelfth supplementary winning data are set. ing. When winning with IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning can be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, neither the first watermelon winning nor the second watermelon winning may occur. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any one of the 10th supplementary prize, the 11th supplementary prize, and the 12th supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the 10th supplementary prize, the 11th supplementary prize, and the 12th supplementary prize may occur.

At IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 13, normal replay winning data is set. When winning at IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 15, a normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

At IV = 9, CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. If the player wins at IV = 9, a CB prize may occur regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the CB winning will not occur.

When the lottery table for non-internal state is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, and the probability of winning when IV = 4. The probability of winning is about 1 / 9.3, and the probability of winning when IV = 5 and the probability of winning when IV = 6 are about 1 / 11.6, respectively. , The probability of winning when IV = 7 is about 1 / 66.7, the probability of winning when IV = 8 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 is. It is about 1 / 4.3.

Next, the lottery table for the internal rear state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 14, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the internal rear state as in the lottery table for the non-internal state, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And the point value PV is set.

The winning data in which IV = 1 to 8 is set is the same as in the case of the non-internal state lottery table.

At IV = 9, the first bell replay winning data and the first cherry replay winning data are set. When winning with IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the first cherry replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

At IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set. When winning at IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the player wins at IV = 10 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, the second bell replay prize is won if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the second bell replay prize to occur. Is prioritized, and the first special replay prize is generated when the timing is such that the second bell replay prize cannot be generated. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

At IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 14, the first bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the second special replay winning data, and the third special replay winning data are set. When winning at IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .. In other cases, the first cherry replay prize, the second special replay prize, or the third special replay prize will occur. In this case, the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay prize is the stop buttons 42 to 44. Occurs regardless of the operation timing. When the winning is achieved at IV = 11 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize can be generated. If this is the case, the occurrence of the 2nd special replay prize or the 3rd special replay prize is prioritized, and if it is the timing when the 2nd special replay prize and the 3rd special replay prize cannot be generated, the 1st cherry replay prize is won. Occurs.

At IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the second special replay winning data are set. When winning at IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the player wins at IV = 12 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, the second bell replay prize is won if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the occurrence of the second bell replay prize. Is prioritized, and the first special replay prize is generated when the timing is such that the second bell replay prize cannot be generated. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the player wins at IV = 12 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the occurrence of the second special replay prize. 2 When the occurrence of the special replay prize is prioritized and the timing at which the second special replay prize cannot be generated, the first cherry replay prize is generated.

At IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set. When winning at IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the player wins at IV = 13 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, the second bell replay prize is won if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the occurrence of the second bell replay prize. Is prioritized, and the first special replay prize is generated when the timing is such that the second bell replay prize cannot be generated. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the first special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the player wins at IV = 13 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the generation of the first special replay prize. 1 When the occurrence of the special replay prize is prioritized and the timing at which the first special replay prize cannot be generated, the first cherry replay prize is generated.

At IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 14, the first cherry replay winning data is set. When winning at IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 15, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. ..

At IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 14, the second cherry replay winning data is set. When winning at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 15, the second cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. ..

At IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 14, the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set. When winning at IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 15, the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the second special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. When winning at IV = 16, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the occurrence of the second special replay prize, the occurrence of the second special replay prize is prioritized, and the second special replay prize is generated. When the special replay prize cannot be generated, the first special replay prize is generated.

When the lottery table for the internal rear state is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, and the probability of winning when IV = 4. The probability of winning is about 1 / 9.3, and the probability of winning when IV = 5 and the probability of winning when IV = 6 are about 1 / 11.6, respectively. , The probability of winning when IV = 7 is about 1 / 66.7, the probability of winning when IV = 8 is about 1 / 2.9, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 The probability is about 1/65, the probability of winning when IV = 10 is about 1/135, the probability of winning when IV = 11 is about 1/3277, and when IV = 12. The probability of winning is about 1/1456, the probability of winning when IV = 13 is about 1/1456, and the probability of winning when IV = 14 is about 1/212, IV. The probability of winning when = 15 is about 1/185, the probability of winning when IV = 16 is about 1/328, and the result is that neither IV = 1 to 16 is won. The probability of becoming 1/65536 is.

Next, the lottery table for the CB state will be described.

An index value IV is set in the CB state lottery table as in the non-internal state lottery table and the internal rear state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And the point value PV is set. In the CB state lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set with IV = 1, and no other winning data is set. Further, the winning probability is the same as in the case of the lottery table for the internal rear state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the winning probability of the normal replay combination may be higher or lower than in the case of the lottery table for the internal rear state may be used.

As described above, only the normal replay combination is set in the lottery table for the CB state, but as already explained, in the CB state, if the normal replay combination is not won, a small winning combination is won regardless of the result of the lottery process. Is possible, and in a situation where the replay combination is not normally won, reel control is executed so that one of the small combination winnings is surely generated. Therefore, in the CB state, if the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay winning is surely generated, and if the normal replay combination is not won, one of the small winning combination is surely generated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 12), after selecting the lottery table in step S302, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is set in the following step S304. To do. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed.

In the winning data acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, the corresponding winning flag setting process is executed. For example, when IV = 1 is won in the CB internal rear state, among the flags provided in the main RAM 74, a flag indicating that IV = 1 is won and a second bell are won. "1" is set for each of the flag, the first compensation winning flag, the fifth compensation winning flag, and the ninth compensation winning flag. Further, for example, when IV = 8 is won in the situation where the CB is in the rear state, a flag indicating that IV = 8 is won among the flags provided in the main RAM 74 and a normal replay winning. Set "1" to each of the flags.

In the following step S402, it is determined in the immediately preceding step S401 whether or not "1" is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the process of lighting the internal state notification unit 63 is executed in step S403, and then the process of acquiring the true selection data is terminated. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on, and the manager and the player of the game hall are notified that the CB is in the rear state.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, it is determined in step S404 whether or not "1" is set in the normal replay winning flag. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S404, the push order lottery process is executed in step S405, and in the following step S406, a push order command including push order data corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process is substituting. After setting to send to the side MPU 82, the acquisition process of the true selection data is completed.

As described above, when the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay prize is generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In this case, in step S405, the push order lottery process is executed in order to generate an opportunity to set the AT1 signal described later in the OFF state. In the push order lottery process, the first stop target reel and the second stop target reel are determined by lottery, and a lottery is performed so that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop target reel. In the sub-side MPU 82, the display control of the image display device 66 is performed so that the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the push order data of the push order command is displayed when the normal AT state described later is in a row. To execute. The actions and effects of performing such processing will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S404, it is determined in step S407 whether or not "1" is set in the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the acquisition process of the true selection data is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S407, the true selection data is set in step S408 after setting a value corresponding to the first freeze time (specifically, 39 sec) in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. Ends the acquisition process of.

When the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and the execution of the processing after step S212 is awaited. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Further, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process in step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when "1" is set in the first special replay winning flag as a result of the lottery process, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 39 seconds. During this freeze period, as will be described later, control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the first freeze-corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that he / she has won the first special replay combination.

If the winning flag in which "1" is set is not the CB winning flag, "0" is cleared after the game in which the winning flag is set ends. On the other hand, when the winning flag in which "1" is set is the CB winning flag, it is reset on condition that the CB winning is established. That is, the state in which "1" is set in the CB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 12), if the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

If it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined as to whether or not the game is correct, it means that the lottery processing result of this game is a wrong result. In this case, in step S309, by checking the flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the CB is in the rear state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S309, a value corresponding to the second freeze time (specifically, 35 sec) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 in step S310.

As described above, when the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and the execution of the processes after step S212 is awaited. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Further, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process in step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, if the result of the lottery process is different in the rear state inside the CB, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 35 seconds. During this freeze period, as will be described later, control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the second freeze-corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery result is out of the CB internal rear state.

When the process of step S306 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S309, or when the process of step S310 is executed, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the lottery result command is set in step S311. The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the winning / failing determination result of the winning combination. After that, in step S312, the first stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the main lottery process is completed.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process in step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S501, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44. Notify the player etc. of that.

Following the rotation start process, in step S502, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. To do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S502 and waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S504.

The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 80 in order to grasp which stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S505, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower row in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop button is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S506, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S506, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, in step S507, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S509. Do. After that, in step S510, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S511, and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12), and by using the stop information, each of them When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position. As the stop information, the slide number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slide number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slide number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 12) and the stop information executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17) There is a second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process. If the stop information set in this case is IV = 1 to 7 in the CB non-internal state, the stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set, and the stop information is set inside the CB. If IV = 1 to 7, 9 to 13 in the rear state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set.

The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To do. In this slot machine 10, when winning is achieved when IV = 1 to 7, 9 to 13 in the CB non-internal state and the CB internal post-state (see FIG. 15), the set winning data and the stop command are given. The second stop information setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that generated the above and the stop result.

By the way, the symbols that form the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, the normal replay prize, the 1st bell replay prize, the 1st cherry replay prize, the 2nd cherry replay prize or the 1st special replay prize are In each of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the maximum number of symbols separated in the circumferential direction is arranged so as to be four symbols. In such a configuration, the combination of the result of the lottery process and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the first bell winning, the second bell winning, the normal replay winning, the first bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, the first. When either the 2 cherry replay prize or the first special replay prize is generated, the stop information is set so that the prize is generated regardless of the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In addition, in the post-CB internal state, one of the small wins or the replay win will be won under the situation where the CB winning flag is set to "1". In this case, the small win corresponding to the winning will be won. Alternatively, the stop information is set so that the replay winning is prioritized over the CB winning. For example, if IV = 1 is won in the rear state of the CB, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the CB prize can be generated, the small prize will be won in relation to the stop information. When the priority number of slides is selected, a small winning combination is generated and a CB winning is not generated. Further, for example, when the replay combination is won in the rear state inside the CB, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the CB prize can be generated, the replay prize is won in relation to the stop information. When the priority number of slides is selected, a replay prize is generated and a CB prize is not generated. However, if the lottery result is out of order, there is no winning combination that is prioritized over the CB winning, so that the CB winning may occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S510 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S512, and the subsequent step S513 After setting the winning result command including the data corresponding to the result of the winning determination process as the output target to the sub control device 80, the reel control process is terminated.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a winning determination process.

In the winning determination process, in step S601, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the left reel 32L is grasped, and in step S602, the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the middle reel 32M is grasped. The type is grasped, and in step S603, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the right reel 32R is grasped. When grasping the type of the symbol, the 2-byte data set for each type of the symbol is read from the main ROM 73. Then, in step S604, as the logical operation processing of the symbol combination, each 2-byte data grasped in steps S601 to S603 is AND-processed with bits of the same order, so that the 2-byte corresponding to the symbol combination is processed. Derive the data.

In the following step S605, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in step S604 corresponds to any of the winning data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, the winning process is executed in step S606. In the winning processing, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the winning flag corresponding to the winning that has occurred this time, and if "1" is not set, an abnormal command is output to the sub control device 80. Set as a target. By receiving the abnormality command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the abnormality notification corresponding to the illegal winning by the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. When "1" is set in the winning flag, if the winning is a small winning combination, the number of medals to be paid out is set to the main side so that medals or virtual medals can be given in the medal payout process. It is set in the payout target counter of the RAM 74. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 11), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets as the current number of bets is executed.

After that, the bell winning determination process is executed in step S607, and the normal replay push order determination process is executed in step S608. These processes are processes for switching the ON / OFF state of the AT1 signal output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 90. Details of these processes will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S605, or if the process of step S608 is executed, the process proceeds to step S609, and in the current lottery process (FIG. 12), the second special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 or the second special replay winning flag or It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third special replay winning flag. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the first weight setting process is executed in step S610, then the main winning determination process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S609, the first weight setting process is performed in step S611. 2 After executing the weight setting process, the final winning determination process is terminated. The first weight setting process and the second weight setting process will be described later.

<CB state processing>
Next, the CB state process executed in step S214 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the CB state by determining whether or not "1" is set in the CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not "1" is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the present CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. Further, in step S703, it is determined whether or not a CB winning has occurred by determining whether or not "1" is set in the CB establishment flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the present CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the CB status flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag and the CB establishment flag are cleared to "0". In the following step S705, "19" is set in the CB middle counter provided in the main RAM 74. The CB middle counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of small wins generated in the CB middle state has reached the CB end condition number of times.

In the following step S706, "2" is set in the bet specified number counter provided in the main RAM 74. As a result, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "2". Therefore, if the number of bets does not reach "2", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated and three or more bets cannot be made.

In the following step S707, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off, and the manager and the player of the game hall are notified that the CB internal rear state has ended. After that, in step S708, the CB start command including the data indicating that the CB in-progress state has been started is set as the output target to the sub control device 80, and then the CB state processing is ended. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like so that the effect corresponding to the CB middle state is executed.

On the other hand, when the CB is in the middle state and an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S709 whether or not a small winning combination has been established in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S709, the present CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, the value of the CB middle counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. Then, in step S711, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter during CB is "0". If it is not "0", the present CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to steps S712 to S714.

In step S712, the CB middle state is terminated by clearing the CB state flag of the main RAM 74 to “0”. In the following step S713, "3" is set in the bet specified number counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". Therefore, if the number of bets does not reach "3", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated and four or more bets cannot be placed.

After that, in step S714, the CB end command including the data indicating that the CB in-progress state has ended is set as the output target to the sub control device 80, and then the CB state process ends. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 ends the effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like.

<Mode of transition of gaming state that occurs under the control of the main MPU 72>
Next, the mode of transition of the gaming state that occurs under the control of the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

When the main RAM 74 is initialized, or when the setting is changed in a situation where the CB winning flag is "0", the CB non-internal state ST1 is set. For example, the CB non-internal state ST1 is set at the start of business of the game hall. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the replay probability is usually about 1/7. In the CB non-internal state ST1, no other replay combination is set as a lottery combination. Further, in the CB non-internal state ST1, the CB probability is about 1 / 4.3 and the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. However, in the CB non-internal state, the control for the AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and it is necessary to answer correctly in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which is 1/4 for the first bell winning. Since it is necessary to answer correctly in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which is 1/2 to win the second bell, the number of sheets to be paid out even if the probability of occurrence of payout is relatively high, about 1 / 1.6 Is basically one sheet. This number is less than the specified number of bets, which is three.

If the CB combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and no CB prize is generated, the process shifts to the CB internal post-state ST2. Further, the CB internal post-state ST2 is also shifted to the case where the setting is changed in the situation where the CB winning flag is "1". In the CB internal post-state ST2, the normal replay probability is higher than that in the CB non-internal state ST1, and is about 1 / 2.9. Further, in the CB internal post-state ST2, since there is a replay combination other than the normal replay combination, the probability of occurrence of the replay is higher. Further, in the CB internal rear state ST2, since the CB winning flag is already set to "1", the CB combination is not set as the lottery combination.

Further, in the CB internal post-state ST2, the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. Here, in the CB internal post-state ST2, the control for the AT state can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82, as will be described in detail later. In the situation where the control for the AT state is not executed, the number of sheets to be paid out is basic even if the payout occurrence probability is relatively high, about 1 / 1.6, as in the case of the CB non-internal state ST1. It becomes one piece. This number is less than the specified number of bets, which is three. On the other hand, in the situation where the control for the AT state is executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for winning the first bell is notified, and the stop for winning the second bell is notified. The pressing order of the buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the payout occurrence probability is relatively high at about 1 / 1.6, and the number of payouts is basically 9 or 4. This number is larger than the specified number of bets, which is three.

If a CB prize is generated in the CB internal post-state ST2, or if a CB combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and a CB prize is generated in the game, the game shifts to the CB medium state ST3. In the CB medium state ST3, as already explained, a small winning combination prize or a replay winning prize occurs in each game. However, in the CB medium state ST3, since the specified number of bets is limited to "2", the number of bets to be paid out is limited to two even if a small winning combination is generated. Therefore, in the CB medium state ST3, the medals owned by the player do not decrease, but do not increase. When a small winning combination is generated 19 times in the CB medium state ST3, the state shifts to the CB non-internal state ST1.

<Light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63>
Next, the light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

21 (a) shows the execution period of the CB winning game, FIG. 21 (b) shows the execution period of the CB internal post-state, and FIG. 21 (c) shows the execution period of the CB in-progress state. ) Indicates the light emitting period of the internal state notification unit 63.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game in which the CB combination is won is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21D, the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started. By starting the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 at the start of the game in which the CB combination is won, the player starts the stop operation of at least the buttons corresponding to the final stop reels of the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to make the player recognize that the CB role has been won by the time.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game in which the CB role is won ends. In this case, since the CB winning has not occurred, the CB internal rear state is obtained as shown in FIG. 21 (b).

After that, when the CB winning occurs at the timing of t3, the CB internal rear state ends as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and the state shifts to the CB middle state as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Further, at the timing of t3 when the state shifts to the CB middle state, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as shown in FIG. 21 (d).

After that, at the timing of t4, the CB in-progress state ends as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game in which the CB combination is won is started again, so that the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started as shown in FIG. 21 (d). At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the game in which the CB combination is won ends without the CB winning being established, the game shifts to the CB internal rear state as shown in FIG. 21 (b). ..

<First weight setting process>
Next, the first weight setting process executed in step S610 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

First, in step S801, it is determined in the lottery process (FIG. 12) whether or not "1" is set in the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the number of times lottery process at the first special time is executed in step S802. In the first special time lottery process, the first lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is set. Read, and read the data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of times lottery from the first number lottery table. Specifically, the number of bonus ATs is set to 1, 2, and 3 times, the probability that 1 time is selected is 2/10, and the probability that 2 times is selected is 5/10. The probability that 3 times will be selected is 3/10. Then, in step S803, the value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S802 is set in the bonus AT number-of-times counter provided in the main RAM 74.

In this slot machine 10, even if "1" is set in the first bell winning flag as described above, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which is 1/4 in order to generate the first bell winning. It is necessary, and even if "1" is set in the second bell winning flag, it is necessary to answer correctly in the order in which the stop buttons 42 to 44, which are halved, are pressed in order to generate the second bell winning. In this case, when the AT state is set, the display control is executed by the sub-side MPU 82 so that the image display device 66 notifies the correct push order. Therefore, in the AT state, the payout of 9 or 4 cards will occur with high probability. This number is larger than the specified number of bets, which is three.

As the AT state, the normal AT state in which the transition trigger and the end trigger are not managed in the main MPU 72 but performed in the sub MPU 82, and the transition trigger and the end trigger are managed in the main MPU 72 and performed in the sub MPU 82. There is a bonus AT state that is not available. The bonus AT state shifts to the bonus AT count counter when a value of 1 or more is set. The normal AT state will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S803 in the first wait setting process, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of one bonus AT state by the main MPU 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, the first weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in step S806, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74. The wait counter is a counter for measuring the wait time forcibly set during the game in the main MPU 72, and the pre-start wait flag sets the set wait time at the end of the set game and next. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify when to generate the game at the start of the game.

After that, in step S807, after setting the start wait command as an output target to the sub control device 80, the first wait setting process ends. By receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the start wait corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the value of the CB winning flag is "1" and the result is out of the lottery process (FIG. 12). judge. Incidentally, as already explained, the probability that the lottery result will be out of order in the CB internal post-state is 1/65536.

If a negative determination is made in step S808, the first weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, the number of times lottery process at the time of the loss result is executed. In the number-of-times lottery process at the time of the deviation result, the second number-of-times lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is read. , The data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of times lottery is read from the second number lottery table. Specifically, the number of bonus ATs is set to 1, 2, and 3 times, the probability that 1 time is selected is 1/10, and the probability that 2 times is selected is 3/10. The probability that 3 times will be selected is 6/10. That is, when the second lottery table is referred to, a larger number of bonus ATs is more likely to be selected than when the first lottery table is referred to. Then, in step S810, a value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S809 is set in the bonus AT number-of-times counter provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, in step S811, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S811, the first weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the wait generation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in the subsequent step S813, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. The wait generation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that a wait time is generated at the end of this game. After that, in step S814, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the first wait setting process ends. By receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first wait-corresponding effect.

As described above, when the first special replay combination is won in the CB internal post-state, or when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out of the CB internal post-state, the game shifts to the bonus AT state. In particular, when the first special replay combination is won, a prize different from the first special replay prize may occur depending on the stop order of each stop button 42 to 44 and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, but the bonus AT The state shifts regardless of the type of winning.

<Second weight setting process>
Next, the second weight setting process executed in step S611 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. The second weight setting process is activated when "1" is set in the second special replay winning flag or the third special replay winning flag as described above.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the output state of the AT1 signal through the external terminal plate 90 is the ON state. The AT1 signal is a signal output from the slot machine 10 in order for the hall computer HC to recognize whether or not it is normally in the AT state. Further, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the first stop of this game is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a negative determination is made in step S901 or step S902, the second weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in both steps S901 and S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the number-of-times lottery process at the second special time is executed. In the second special time lottery process, the third lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is set. It is read out, and the data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of times lottery is read out from the third number lottery table. Specifically, the number of bonus ATs is set to 1, 2, and 3 times, the probability that one time is selected is 7/10, and the probability that two times are selected is 2/10. The probability that 3 times will be selected is 1/10. That is, when the third lottery table is referred to, a smaller number of bonus ATs is more likely to be selected than when the first lottery table and the second lottery table are referred to. Then, in step S904, the value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S903 is set in the bonus AT number-of-times counter of the main RAM 74.

After that, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the second weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in the following step S907, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. After that, in step S908, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the second wait setting process ends. By receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first wait-corresponding effect.

As described above, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the rear state inside the CB, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. It shifts to the bonus AT state on condition that it has been operated. However, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first special A prize different from the replay prize may occur, but the type of prize generated does not matter when shifting to the bonus AT state.

<Bonus AT management process>
Next, the bonus AT management process executed in step S215 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is in the bonus AT state by determining whether or not "1" is set in the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74. By making a negative determination in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the bonus AT management process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "30", which is the number of continuations of one set, and the bonus AT state of the main RAM 74 is set. Set the flag to "1". The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of one bonus AT state by the main MPU 72. After that, in step S1004, the bonus AT start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the bonus AT management process is terminated. By receiving the bonus AT start command, the sub-side MPU 82 recognizes that the bonus AT state has been started, and sets the content of the effect on the speaker 65, the image display device 66, etc. to correspond to the start of the bonus AT state. ..

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 in step S1005. Then, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter is "0". If it is not "0", the bonus AT management process is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1, and in the subsequent step S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter is "0". If it is "0", the bonus AT status flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S1009, and the bonus AT end flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in step S1010. "Is set. The bonus AT end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the bonus AT state has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S1008, or when the process of step S1010 is executed, the value of the end wait time (5 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 in step S1011. After that, in step S1012, the bonus AT end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the bonus AT management process is ended. The bonus AT end command includes data corresponding to the value of the bonus AT count counter, that is, data indicating whether or not a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started after the execution time of the current bonus AT state is completed. Is included.

In the sub-side MPU 82, when a bonus AT end command including data indicating that a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started is received, the speaker 65 so as to execute an effect indicating that the bonus AT state continues. And the image display device 66 and the like are controlled. On the other hand, when a bonus AT end command that does not include data indicating that a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started is received, the speaker 65 and the image so that the effect indicating that the bonus AT state ends is executed. It controls the display device 66 and the like.

Here, in the normal process (FIG. 11), if it is determined in step S218 that the end wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219. In the bonus AT setting process, the processes of steps S1001 to S1004 in the bonus AT management process (FIG. 24) are executed. That is, when the bonus AT status flag is "0" and the value of the bonus AT count counter is 1 or more, "30" is set in the bonus AT counter and "1" is set in the bonus AT status flag. , Further, a bonus AT start command is transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, when the bonus AT state continues, a new bonus AT state of the execution times is started from the game immediately after the final game of the bonus AT state of one execution time is completed.

In addition, since the end wait time is intervened between the bonus AT state of one execution time and the bonus AT state of the new execution time as described above, it is continuous between each bonus AT state at the time of consecutive villas. A period for executing various operations for the villa is secured.

<Situation when the first special replay is won or lost>
Next, a state in which the first special replay is won or lost in the CB internal rear state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 25 (a) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, FIG. 25 (b) shows the execution period of the game when the first special replay is won or the result is lost, and FIG. 25 (c) shows the other games. 25 (d) shows the freeze period, and FIG. 25 (e) shows the wait period.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), when the game that won the first special replay is started at the timing of t1, a freeze period (39 sec) occurs as shown in FIG. 25 (d). During this freeze period, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Then, at the timing of t2, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 25 (d). In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), when the current game ends, the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 25 (a).

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), a new game is started, and as shown in FIG. 25 (e), the wait period set at the end of the previous game starts. Will be done. During this wait period, the bet is not set by the previous replay winning and the operation of the start lever 41 is not activated. Then, at the timing of t5, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. 25 (e). In this case, the bet is set by the previous replay winning, and the operation of the start lever 41 is activated. Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the current game ends.

After that, at the timing of t7, which is the situation where the bonus AT state continues, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game that won the first special replay is restarted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period occurs from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, while as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. There is no wait period in the next game that continues.

That is, even if the first special replay is won, the wait period will occur if the situation is not in the bonus AT state, but the wait period will not occur if the situation is in the bonus AT state. As a result, when the first special replay is won in a situation where the player is not in the bonus AT state, the execution period of the effect corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state is secured in order to appropriately enhance the superiority complex of the player, while the bonus If the first special replay is won in the AT state, the speed of the game in the bonus AT state can be increased by omitting the period.

After that, at the timing of t11 after the end of the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game in which the lottery result is out of order is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period occurs from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, and further, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. , There will be a wait period in this game. At the timing of t14, which is the timing at which this wait period ends, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game resulting in the deviation ends, and further, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the bonus AT state starts. Will be done. Then, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), a new game is started under the bonus AT state.

<Situation when the 2nd special replay is won or the 3rd special replay is won>
Next, a state in which the second special replay is won or the third special replay is won in the post-internal state of the CB will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 26.

FIG. 26 (a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 26 (b) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 26 (c) shows the second special replay win or the third special replay win. The game execution period of the case is shown, FIG. 26 (d) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 26 (e) shows the wait period.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), at the timing of t1 in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game in which the second special replay is won or the third special replay is won is started. .. Then, at the timing of t2, when the game ends as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 26 (a), and the normal AT state is terminated and shown in FIG. 26 (b). As such, the bonus AT state is started.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), a new game is started, and as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the wait period set at the end of the previous game starts. Will be done. During this wait period, the bet is not set by the previous replay winning and the operation of the start lever 41 is not activated. Then, at the timing of t4, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. 25 (e). In this case, the bet is set by the previous replay winning, and the operation of the start lever 41 is activated. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the current game ends.

After that, at the timing of t6, which is the situation where the bonus AT state continues, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game in which the second special replay is won or the third special replay is won is started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t7, and the next game starts from the timing of t8. However, the wait period does not occur in the game.

That is, even if the second special replay is won or the third special replay is won, the wait period is generated if the situation is not the bonus AT state, but the wait period is not generated if the situation is the bonus AT state. As a result, when the second special replay win or the third special replay win occurs in a situation where the player is not in the bonus AT state, the execution period of the effect corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state in order to appropriately enhance the superiority complex of the player. On the other hand, if the second special replay win or the third special replay win occurs in the situation of the bonus AT state, it is possible to increase the sense of speed of the game in the bonus AT state by omitting the period. It becomes.

After that, at the timing of t9, which is the situation after the end of the bonus AT state and not the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game that won the second special replay or the third special replay won. It will be started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t10, and as shown in FIG. 26D, the next game is executed at the timing of t11. However, the wait period does not occur in the game. Further, even if the game ends, the transition to the bonus AT state does not occur.

That is, even if the second special replay is won or the third special replay is won in a situation other than the normal AT state, it does not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit for the player of staying in the normal AT state, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the normal AT state. In addition, by not generating the wait period under the situation that does not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state in this way, the wait period for the production is generated under the situation where the player does not generate any profit. Is suppressed, and it becomes possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Relationship between CB state and bonus AT state>
Next, the relationship between the CB state and the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 27.

FIG. 27 (a) shows the setting status of the CB winning flag, FIG. 27 (b) shows the execution period of the CB in-progress state, FIG. 27 (c) shows the execution period of the game as a result of the deviation, and FIG. 27 (d). ) Indicates the execution period of other games, FIG. 27 (e) indicates the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 27 (f) indicates the timing at which the number of games is counted.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), at the timing of t1 under the situation where the CB winning flag is set to "1", the game of the off result is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b), and the timing of t2. Then, the game ends. In this case, a CB prize is generated at the end of the game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, not only the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 27 (e), but also the CB winning flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 27 (a). As shown in (b), the CB in-progress state is also started. In this case, since the CB state is prioritized as the game state, the specified number of bets, the content of the lottery process, the reel control mode, and the number of payouts for the small winning combination are set to those in the CB state. .. However, the progress of the bonus AT state is not waited, and the number of games executed in the CB state is consumed as the game in the bonus AT state.

After that, in the CB state and the bonus AT state, the game is executed at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 27 (f), and the number of games is increased. Is counted. As a result, the digestion of the game in the CB middle state and the digestion of the game in the bonus AT state occur at the same time. Then, at the timing of t5, the small winning combination prize is generated 19 times in the CB middle state, and as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the CB middle state ends. As a result, only the bonus AT state is obtained. However, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), since the CB winning flag is in the “0” state and the CB non-internal state, the main MPU 72 executes the process of advancing the bonus AT state, but the sub MPU 82. Then, the notification of the push order for generating the first bell prize and the second bell prize is not executed.

After that, at the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 27 (f), the game is executed in a situation where the CB is not inside and the bonus AT state, and the number of games is increased. It is counted. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the CB combination is won and "1" is set in the CB winning flag. As a result, not only the process of advancing the bonus AT state is executed in the main MPU 72, but also the sub-side MPU 82 is notified of the push order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

<Execution control of various notifications and various effects in the sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the processing configuration of the sub-side MPU 82 for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

<Periodic processing>
First, the periodic processing executed periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main MPU 72. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1102. The ring buffer is a buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands, and the write pointer is updated and read each time the write processing of the command to the area indicated by the write pointer is executed and the write processing is executed. The read pointer is updated each time the read process of the command from the area indicated by the pointer is executed and the read process is executed. The reading point is updated when the command is read in one processing time of the periodic processing and when the periodic processing of the next processing time is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S1101 or when the process of step S1102 is executed, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the CB is in the post-internal state. In the sub-side MPU 82, as will be described later, it is specified that the CB internal post-state has been started by receiving the lottery result command corresponding to the CB combination winning from the main side MPU 72, and the CB internal by receiving the CB start command. Identify that the post-state has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, whether or not the sub-side MPU 82 is executing AT control by checking the flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1104. To judge. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the non-AT processing is executed in step S1105, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the AT processing is executed in step S1106. These non-AT processing and AT processing will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1103, when the process of step S1105 is executed, or when the process of step S1106 is executed, in step S1107, the freeze period and the wait period are set in the main MPU 72. In addition to executing the standby effect setting process for executing the corresponding effect and notification, in step S1108, the CB setting process for executing the effect and notification corresponding to the CB in-progress state. To execute.

After that, in step S1109, display data setting processing for executing an effect or notification by displaying a moving image or a still image on the image display device 66 is executed, and in step S1110, the upper lamp 64 and privilege points are executed. The light emission data setting process for executing the light emission control of the notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the winning number notification unit 69 is executed, and in step S1111, the sound and sound for production and notification are output through the speaker 65. Execute the setting process of the sound output data to be performed. After that, this cycle processing is terminated.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process of step S1107 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command corresponding to the first special replay winning is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, in step S1202, the standby effect setting process ends after setting "1" in the first freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. By setting "1" to the first freeze flag, it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the first freeze time (39 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be used is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the first freeze time. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the first freeze time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time in the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the off result is received from the main MPU 72 in the CB internal rear state. When the lottery result command is received, in step S1204, the second freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting "1" to the second freeze flag, it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the second freeze time (35 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be used is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the second freeze time. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the second freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the second freeze time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform a light emission effect and a sound output effect according to the display effect of the image display device 66.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the start wait command is received from the main MPU 72. If the start wait command has been received, in step S1206, the start wait flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting the start wait flag to "1", data that enables display of a moving image corresponding to the start wait time (8 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the start wait time. Specifically, a display effect indicating that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred is performed. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the start wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the start is started. The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the start wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1207 whether or not the bonus AT end command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT end command is received, in step S1208, the bonus AT end flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process is ended. By setting the bonus AT end flag to "1", it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the end wait time (5 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the end wait time. Specifically, a display effect indicating that one set of the bonus AT state has been completed is performed. Further, the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) reads out the light emission data corresponding to the end wait time, and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) ends. The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the end wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the consecutive villa wait command is received from the main MPU 72. As will be described later, the Renso wait command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the output state of the AT1 signal set in the ON state is once set to the OFF state and then set to the ON state again. Then, when the output of the AT1 signal is set, the consecutive villa wait time (1 sec) is set in the main MPU 72.

If the consecutive villa wait command has not been received, the main standby effect setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the consecutive villa wait command is received, in step S1210, the continuous villa wait flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting the flag for the consecutive villa weight to "1", it is possible to display a still image corresponding to the consecutive villa wait time (1 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be used is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the consecutive villa wait time.

<Setting process for CB>
Next, the CB setting process of step S1108 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a winning result command corresponding to the winning of the CB combination and the non-winning of the CB is received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command is received, "1" is set in the CB internal flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1302. This makes it possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that it is in the CB internal rear state.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301 or when the process of step S1302 is executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the CB start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the CB start command is received, "1" is set in the CB middle flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1304, and the CB internal flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "" in step S1305. "0" is cleared. This makes it possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that it is in the CB state.

Further, by setting "1" to the CB middle flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables display of the moving image corresponding to the CB middle state is displayed. It reads from the sub ROM 83 and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the state during CB. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the state during CB is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the CB is read. The sound output data corresponding to the medium state is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state in the image display device 66 are performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, or when the process of step S1305 is executed, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not "1" is set in the CB middle flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If "1" is set in the CB middle flag, the effect content update process is executed in step S1307. In the update process of the effect content, a process for updating the display of the remaining small winning combination winning counts in the CB displayed on the image display device 66 in response to receiving the winning result command from the main MPU 72 is performed. At the same time, the process for notifying the information of the winning combination is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1306, or when the process of step S1307 is executed, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the CB end command is received from the main MPU 72. If the CB end command is not received, the setting process for this CB is terminated as it is, and if the CB end command is received, after clearing the CB middle flag of the sub RAM 84 in step S1309 to "0". , Ends the setting process for this CB. As a result, the effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is completed.

<Processing during non-AT on the sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the processing contents during non-AT executed in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described. Prior to the description of the specific processing content executed by the sub-side MPU 82, the mode of transition from the non-AT state to the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31.

As a mode for shifting to a situation in which the CB internal post-state is in the non-AT state (hereinafter referred to as the normal state ST11) and the CB internal post-state is in the normal AT state (hereinafter referred to as the normal AT state ST12). There are three types of modes.

The first transition mode is that when the sub-side RAM 84 is initialized, the normal AT state ST12 ends and shifts to the normal state ST11, or the bonus AT state ST17 ends and the normal AT state ST12 is reached. This is a case where the number of games for the number of ceiling games determined by lottery is consumed in the sub-side MPU 82 when the game shifts to the normal state ST11 without shifting. When shifting to the normal AT state ST12 in this embodiment, the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is first shifted, and then the number of ceiling games is consumed (ST14), so that the normal AT state ST12 is reached. The transition to the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is made when the number of ceiling games is 32 games remaining. In the ceiling game precursor state ST13, as the effect content of each game in the image display device 66, the effect of shifting to the normal AT state ST12 is higher than the situation in which the normal state ST11 is not the ceiling game precursor state ST13. It will be easier to execute.

Even if the number of ceiling games is not 32 games remaining, a false precursor state is obtained by winning the false precursor lottery in the sub-side MPU 82. In the false omen state, as the production content of each game in the image display device 66, the degree of expectation of transition to the normal AT state ST12 is higher than the situation in which the normal state ST11 is neither the ceiling game omen state ST13 nor the false omen state. It becomes easier to execute a high-quality effect.

In the second transition mode, the activation lottery process executed when the predetermined combination is won results in the activation winning and the transition to the transition chance state ST16, and further, the replay combination is won in the transition chance state ST16. This is the case when the transition is won in the transition lottery process that was executed as a result of the change. However, if the end condition of the transition chance state ST16 is satisfied without winning the transition, the process returns to the normal state ST11 without shifting to the normal AT state ST12. In the transition chance state ST16, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the transition chance state is ST16.

When shifting to the transition chance state ST16, first, the transition chance precursor state ST15 is entered, and then the transition chance state ST16 is entered when the number of games for the precursor is exhausted in the transition chance precursor state ST15. In the transition chance precursor state ST15, as the production content of each game in the image display device 66, the production with a higher expectation of transition to the transition chance state ST16 is higher than the situation in which the normal state ST11 is not the transition chance precursor state ST15. It will be easier to execute.

Even in a situation where the transition chance precursor state is not ST15, it becomes a false precursor state by winning the false precursor lottery in the sub-side MPU 82. In the false precursor state, as the production content of each game in the image display device 66, the degree of expectation of transition to the transition chance state ST16 is higher than the situation in which the normal state ST11 is neither the transition chance precursor state ST15 nor the false precursor state. It becomes easier to execute a high-quality effect.

The third transition mode is a case where the transition is made to the bonus AT state ST17 and the transition is made after the bonus AT state ST17 is completed. However, if the bonus AT state ST17 has shifted under the penalty situation described later, even if the bonus AT state ST17 ends, it does not shift to the normal AT state ST12. It should be noted that a transition from the normal AT state ST12 to the bonus AT state ST17 may occur.

<Processing during non-AT>
Next, the non-AT processing in step S1105 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub RAM 84 in step S1402.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401 or when the process of step S1402 is executed, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not a stop command command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the stop command command is received, in step S1404, the stop order data is written to the sub RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this game.

When a negative determination is made in step S1403, or when the process of step S1404 is executed, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the non-AT processing is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the winning result command this time corresponds to the transition to the bonus AT state. Specifically, when the data indicating that the first special replay combination has been won in the CB internal post-state is specified from the winning result command, or the data indicating that the result is out of the CB internal post-state is If it is specified from the winning result command, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406. In addition to that, data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination has been won in the situation where the AT1 signal is ON in the CB internal rear state is specified from the winning result command. Further, even when it is specified by the stop order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 that the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether or not the winning result command includes data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination has been won. To do. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1407, it means that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred under the condition of a penalty.

Specifically, on the condition that the first bell winning or the second bell winning occurs three times as a result of stopping other than the left reel 32L as the first stop even though the sub-side MPU 82 is not in the AT state. As will be described later, when the AT1 signal is turned on and the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won and a stop other than the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop, the game is played on the main MPU 72. Shift the state to the bonus AT state. However, since this event is a penalty target event, the AT state is not set in the sub-side MPU 82. Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, "1" is set in the penalty AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1408. The penalty AT flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that it is a bonus AT state generated under the penalty situation.

When a negative determination is made in step S1407, or when the process of step S1408 is executed, "1" is set in the bonus AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1409, and the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". "4" is set in the provided execution target counter. The bonus AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that the gaming state managed in the main-side MPU 72 is the bonus AT state, and the execution target counter sub-subscribes the processing content to be executed in the AT state. It is a counter for specifying by the side MPU 82. When "4" is set in the execution target counter, the process for advancing the bonus AT state is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. After that, the processing during this non-AT is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1410 whether or not a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the non-AT state in the CB internal rear state, and either winning is generated. When a penalty event occurs, the actual medal award rate may be higher than the medal award rate in the non-AT state set in the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, the player is disadvantaged, so that the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop in the non-AT state.

When a penalty event occurs, the image data for the penalty is set in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and the sound output data setting process (step S1111). The sound output data for the penalty is set at. As a result, the player is notified that the penalty event has occurred.

When a penalty event occurs, in step S1411, addition processing to the penalty counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed. In the addition process, "5", which is a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to the penalty, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. After that, the processing during this non-AT is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1410, the transition chance management process is executed in step S1412, and the ceiling game management process is executed in step S1413. Then, after executing the prize-winning processing in step S1414, the non-AT processing is terminated. In the prize-winning processing, processing is executed so that the image corresponding to the winning combination of this time is displayed on the image display device 66, and the sound corresponding to the occurrence of the prize is output through the speaker 65. Perform the process to do so.

<Transition opportunity management process>
Next, the transition chance management process in step S1412 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. Since the transition chance management process is started on the condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, it is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the transition chance counter is in the transition chance state by determining whether or not the value of the transition chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The transition chance counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is in the transition chance state and when the transition chance state ends. If it is not in the transition chance state, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the value of the transition standby counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, and whether or not it is in the transition chance precursor state. To judge. The transition standby counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the transition chance precursor state is present and the end trigger of the transition chance precursor state by the sub-side MPU 82.

If it is not in the transition chance precursor state, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the transition chance activation trigger has been won. If any of IV = 7, 9-12, 14-16 is won in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the transition chance trigger. However, even if it corresponds to the winning of the transition chance triggering role, if it is the transition trigger to the bonus AT state, the affirmative judgment is not made in step S1503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of steps S150 to S1508 is not executed, so that the transition opportunity of the transition chance state does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the activation lottery table corresponding to both the current transition chance activation trigger and the number of digested games since the previous transition to the non-AT state is read from the sub-side ROM 83. Then, in step S1506, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the activation lottery table.

Here, in the activation lottery table, 0 times, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times are set as the remaining number of transition chances. In addition, in the activation lottery table, the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that one or more remaining transition chances will be selected and the higher the probability that a larger number of remaining transition chances will be selected. In addition to being set, the probability that one or more remaining transition chances will be selected and the probability that a larger number of remaining transition chances will be selected as the number of digested games since the previous transition to the non-AT state increases. It is set to be high.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not one or more remaining transition chances have been selected in the activation lottery process of step S1506. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, the number of remaining transition chances selected in the current activation lottery process is added to the transition chance remaining counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1508. The transition chance remaining counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify whether or not there is a transition opportunity to the transition chance state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or the process of step S1508 is executed, the sub-side RAM 84 is executed in step S1509. It is determined whether or not the value of the transition chance remaining counter of is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. The ceiling remaining game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining ceiling games in the sub-side MPU 82. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is without setting the transition chance precursor state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the event of shifting to the transition chance state or staying in the transition chance state immediately before the transition to the normal AT state occurs due to the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games, and it becomes possible to prevent the event of staying in the transition chance state. It is possible to prevent multiple triggers for transition to the state from occurring.

If a negative determination is made in step S1510, the transition standby counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "10", which is the number of continuous games in the transition chance precursor state, in step S1511. As a result, it becomes a precursor of a transition opportunity. After that, the transition chance management process is terminated. When the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, the effect content of the image display device 66 is set to the content corresponding to the transition chance precursor state.

When the transition chance precursor state is reached, the process proceeds to step S1512 by making an affirmative determination in step S1502. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is. As a result, in the penalty state, the number of continuous games in the transition chance precursor state is not consumed, and the transition to the transition chance state is delayed.

When the value of the penalty counter is "0", the value of the transition standby counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 in step S1513, and the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in the subsequent step S1514. Determine if it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1514, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S1515.

In step S1515, the value of the transition chance remaining counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. In the following step S1516, the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "10", which is the number of continuous games in the transition chance state. As a result, a transition chance state is established. After that, the transition chance management process is terminated. When the value of the shift chance counter is 1 or more, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the shift chance state is in the transition chance state.

When the transition chance state is reached, the process proceeds to step S1517 by making an affirmative determination in step S1501. In step S1517, the process during the transition chance is executed. After that, the transition chance management process is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process during the transition chance.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the expected degree improving combination has been won. The expectation level improving role is the same as the transition chance triggering role determined in step S1503 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 33). That is, when the lottery table for the internal rear state (FIG. 14) is won at any of IV = 7, 9 to 12, 14 to 16, it is determined that the winning combination is won. However, even if the winning combination of the expectation level is applied, if it is an opportunity to shift to the bonus AT state, the affirmative judgment is not made in step S1601.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1603 to S1606 is not executed, so that the setting opportunity for improving the expectation degree does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, the transition probability UP lottery process is executed. In the transition probability UP lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the probability of winning the transition by one step in the transition lottery process of step S1609 described later. The probabilities of winning the transition in the transition lottery process in step S1609 are set to 1/10, 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, and 5/10. Specifically, regarding the processing content of the shift probability UP lottery process, first, the shift probability UP lottery table corresponding to the expected degree improving combination this time is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The transition probability UP lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability of winning the transition probability UP. Further, in the transfer probability UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is set to the transfer probability UP lottery table. And collate.

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the transition probability UP has been won. When the transition probability UP is won, in step S1605, the transition lottery table referred to in step S1609 described later is changed to a table in which the probability of winning the transition is one step higher than the current table. As a result, the probability of winning the transition is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S1604 or when the process of step S1605 is executed, a value corresponding to the current winning combination is set in the delay counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1606. The delay counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not to delay the end trigger of the transition chance state. When "1", "3", "5", "7", and "10" are set as the values set in step S1606 and the winning IV value is "7", When "1" is selected and the winning IV values are "9" and "10", "3" is selected and when the winning IV values are "11" and "12". Is selected, "7" is selected when the winning IV value is "14", "15", and "16" is selected when the winning IV value is "16". "10" is selected.

When a negative determination is made in step S1601, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, or the process of step S1606 is executed, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the normal replay combination has been won. If the normal replay combination is won, in step S1608, it is determined whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of step S1609 and step S1610 is not executed, so that the execution trigger of the transition lottery process does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, the transition lottery process is executed. In the transition lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read from the currently read transition lottery table. And collate. Then, in step S1610, it is determined whether or not the transition has been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S1607, an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, or a negative determination is made in step S1610, the value of the delay counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more in step S1611. Determine if it exists. If the value of the delay counter is 1 or more, the value of the delay counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1612, and then the process during this transition chance is terminated. If the value of the delay counter is "0", in step S1613, the value of the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and then the process during this transition chance is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1610 that the transition has been won, the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1614 to S1617 is executed. Specifically, in step S1614, "1" is set in the normal AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The normal AT flag is a flag for specifying that the sub-side MPU 82 is in the normal AT state.

In the following step S1615, the continuous game number lottery process at the start of the normal AT is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT is read from the sub ROM 83. There are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the normal number of continuous games lottery table at the start of AT, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 5/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are The probability of being selected is 1/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is used in the continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT. Match against.

In the following step S1616, the value of the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S1615 is set in the normal AT game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The normal AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in one set of normal AT states by the sub-side MPU 82.

In the following step S1617, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". When "0" is set in the execution target counter, the process for advancing the pre-branch AT state in the normal AT state is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. After that, the processing during this transition chance is terminated.

<Ceiling game management process>
Next, the ceiling game management process in step S1413 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. Since the ceiling game management process is started on the condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, it is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game precursor state is achieved by determining whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 32 or less. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the value of the penalty counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1703, and then the main ceiling game management process is terminated. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the number of ceiling games is not subtracted even if the game is digested.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701 or a negative determination is made in step S1702, the value of the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 in step S1704. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the main ceiling game management process is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", after executing the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1706 to S1709. , End the main ceiling game management process. The processing contents of steps S1706 to S1709 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1614 to S1617 in the transition chance processing (FIG. 34). As a result, the normal AT state is entered.

<Processing during AT in the sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the processing contents during AT executed in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described. Prior to the explanation of the specific processing contents executed by the sub-side MPU 82, each game state included in the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 36.

As the AT state, as described above, there are a normal AT state ST21 and a bonus AT state ST22. In either of the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, if the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) on the main MPU 72, those prizes can be won. The control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the purpose is notified. However, in the normal AT state ST21, the start and end settings are set by the sub-side MPU 82 instead of the main MPU 72, whereas in the bonus AT state ST22, the start and end settings are set by the sub-side MPU 82 instead of the sub-side MPU 82. This is done by the side MPU 72.

Of these normal AT state ST21 and bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST22 has only one type of state, whereas the normal AT state ST21 has the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32. , There are four types of states, the final chance state ST33 and the additional state ST34.

The pre-branch AT state ST31 is an AT state that continues for the number of continuous games set at the start of the game. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the pre-branch AT state ST31 is in the pre-branch AT state ST31. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, the game shifts to the branch AT state ST32 when the games for the set number of continuous games are digested.

In the branch AT state ST32, the image display device 66 performs a battle effect using the ally character and the enemy character. In the battle effect, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state ST21 is 1 or more, or if the AT continuation winning is achieved in the AT continuation lottery process, the ally character wins the effect or both characters are drawn as a battle effect. The effect is selected, and in other cases, the defeat effect of the ally character is selected.

When the victory effect or the draw effect is executed, the player returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31, and when the defeat effect is executed, the player shifts to the final chance state ST33. In the final chance state ST33, the revival lottery process is executed according to the content of the winning combination of the game in the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32, and the content of the winning combination of the game in the final chance state ST33, and the revival winning is achieved. In that case, it returns to the AT state ST31 before branching.

In the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32, the game shifts to the additional state ST34 according to the content of the winning combination of the game in these states. When the transition condition to the additional state ST34 is satisfied in the pre-branch AT state ST31, the game shifts to the additional state ST34 from the next game of the game in which the transition condition is satisfied even in the middle of the pre-branch AT state ST31. On the other hand, if the transition condition to the additional state ST33 is satisfied in the middle of the branch AT state ST32, the transition to the additional state ST34 is performed after the end of the branch AT state ST32.

In the added state ST34, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the added state is ST34. In the additional state ST34, the additional lottery process is executed according to the winning combination of the game, and the number of sets of the normal AT state ST21 is added by the additional winning. When the end condition is satisfied in the additional state ST34, the state shifts to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

In any of the pre-branch AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, the final chance state ST33, and the additional state ST34, the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus AT state ST22 by setting the transition to the bonus AT state ST22. In the bonus AT state ST22, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the bonus AT state is ST22. When the pre-branch AT state ST31 shifts to the bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST22 returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31, and when the branch AT state ST32 shifts to the bonus AT state ST22, the bonus After the end of the AT state ST22, it returns to the branch AT state ST32, and when it shifts to the bonus AT state ST22 in the additional state ST34, it returns to the additional state ST34 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22. On the other hand, when the final chance state ST33 shifts to the bonus AT state ST22, the transition to the pre-branch AT state ST31 occurs after the end of the bonus AT state ST22.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the process during AT in step S1106 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub RAM 84 in step S1802.

After that, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and in step S1804, whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. Is determined, and in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won. If a negative judgment is made in both step S1803 and step S1804, and a positive judgment is made in step S1805, each stop button that enables the generation of the first bell winning or the second bell winning in step S1806 is performed. The push order data of 42 to 44 is read from the contents of the lottery result command received this time and written to the sub RAM 84.

That is, in the bonus AT state generated by the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning in a situation other than the normal AT state and the middle reel 32M or 32R being stopped as the first stop, each stop button 42 to 44 is pressed. The order is not notified. Further, in the normal AT state in which the penalty event has occurred, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not notified until the penalty game is exhausted. Further, since the processing in step S1103 is executed in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the processing during this AT is not executed in a situation other than the CB internal post-state, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is also notified in this case. Not done. On the other hand, in the AT state, which is not under the penalty situation, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the expectation of medal award is higher than in the case of other gaming states.

Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, the bell winning is not generated, but it is not treated as a penalty event. That is, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, events such as the end of the AT state, the temporary interruption of the AT state, and the decrease in the winning probability of the normal replay combination. Does not occur.

When a negative judgment is made in step S1801, when a positive judgment is made in step S1803, when a positive judgment is made in step S1804, when a negative judgment is made in step S1805, or when the process of step S1806 is executed. Determines in step S1807 whether or not a stop command command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the stop command command is received, in step S1808, the stop order data is written to the sub RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this game.

When a negative determination is made in step S1807, or when the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has been received, the winning processing is executed in step S1810. In the prize-winning processing, processing is executed so that the image corresponding to the winning combination of this time is displayed on the image display device 66, and the sound corresponding to the occurrence of the prize is output through the speaker 65. Perform the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S1809, or when the process of step S1810 is executed, the value of the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is grasped in step S1811. As described above, the execution target counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the AT state by the sub-side MPU 82.

As the processes executed by the sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state, the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812) for controlling the execution of the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state for performing the execution control of the branch AT state. Processing (step S1813), addition state processing for performing execution control of the addition state (step S1814), final chance processing for performing execution control of the final chance state (step S1815), and bonus AT state. A bonus AT process (step S1816) for controlling execution in the sub-side MPU 82 of the above is set.

In such a processing configuration, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is in the AT provided in the sub-side ROM 83. In the address table, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the execution target counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812), and the start address SA1 is the start of the program for executing the branch AT state process (step S1813). It is an address, the start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the additional state process (step S1814), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the final chance process (step S1815). Yes, the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the bonus AT process (step S1816). Hereinafter, each process of steps S1812 to S1816 will be described in detail.

<Processing for AT state before branching>
First, the pre-branch AT state process executed in step S1812 of the process during AT (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1901, a normal replay process is executed. The normal replay process, which will be described in detail later, is a process for generating an opportunity when the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in the main MPU 72 during the continuous villa in the normal AT state.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, in step S1903, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed.

In the following step S1904, after adding the privilege reference value “7” to the privilege point counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84, the processing for the AT state before the main branch is terminated. The privilege point counter is a counter for specifying the number of sets in the normal AT state in the sub-side MPU 82. The privilege point counter is added when the privilege point lottery trigger is won in the normal AT state and the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more), the number of times the normal AT state is set is n times, and even if the current normal AT state ends, the normal AT state is concerned. Will be in a row n times.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command is received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the penalty counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1907, and then the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated.

If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more in the pre-branch AT state, the AT preparation data is set in the display data setting process in step S1109 in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and the AT in the image display device 66. An image indicating that preparations are in progress is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the first addition process. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first addition process.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the privilege lottery trigger has been won. If any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 is won in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the prize lottery trigger has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the privilege point lottery process is executed in step S2002. In the privilege point lottery process, the privilege point lottery table corresponding to the current privilege lottery trigger is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as privilege points, and the larger the value of the winning IV, the more privilege points are 1 or more. Is set so that the probability of being selected is high, and the higher the value of the winning IV is, the higher the probability of being selected as a privilege point having a larger value. Further, in the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the privilege point lottery table. To do.

In the following step S2003, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the privilege points won this time are 2 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the privilege points won this time are "1", the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before is written to the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

When a negative determination is made in step S2001, a negative determination is made in step S2003, or the process of step S2005 is executed, the distribution flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S2006. Is set or not. The distribution flag is for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that when two or more privilege points are selected in the privilege point lottery process, it is necessary to divide the two or more privilege points into a plurality of consecutive games. Flag of.

If the distribution flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written to the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points allocated to this game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

If the number of privilege points won this time is 2 or more, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2004 and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the distribution lottery process is executed. In the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table corresponding to the privilege points this time is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the sub-side is concerned. The value of the lottery counter is collated with the distribution lottery table. For example, if the selected privilege point is "2", the probability that 2 will be added to the privilege point counter in this game is 1/2, and the privilege point counter for this game and the next game respectively. The probability that 1 is added to is 1/2. In addition, when the selected privilege points are 3 or more, the addition to the privilege point counter can be distributed over 3 consecutive games including this game.

In the following step S2009, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution lottery process is the distribution winning result. That is, it is determined whether or not the addition to the privilege point counter is distributed to a plurality of consecutive games. If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2005 already described.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, in step S2010, the distribution flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the distribution data indicating the distribution mode of the privilege points selected this time is sent to the sub-side RAM 84. Write. After that, in step S2011, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written to the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points allocated to this game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

When a negative determination is made in step S2006, when the process of step S2007 is executed, or when the process of step S2011 is executed, after executing the setting process of the additional state in step S2012, the first addition is performed. End the process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the added state.

In step S2101, the calculation process is executed for the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before stored in the register of the sub-side MPU 82 in step S2005, step S2007 or step S2011 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

In the following step S2102, the calculation process is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

After that, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the remainder value derived by the arithmetic processing in step S2102 is smaller than the remainder value derived by the arithmetic processing in step S2101. In the configuration where the value of the privilege points that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the standard value corresponding to the above addition, the value after the addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than the value before the addition is the privilege point. It means that the privilege points having a value larger than 7 × (n-1) and smaller than 7 × n due to the addition of the counter became 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that the number of sets in the normal AT state has been added.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the setting process of the addition state is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, "1" is set in the additional state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. In the following step S2105, "2" is set in the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. When "2" is set in the execution target counter, the process for the additional state of step S1814 is executed in the next process during AT (FIG. 37).

In the following step S2106, the lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed. In the additional state, the number of sets in the normal AT state is likely to be added, but the additional state ends when the number of times the normal replay is won reaches the number of compensation replays. The lottery process for the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays that triggers the end of the addition state at the time of transition to the addition state by lottery.

In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the additional state is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the additional state, "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of compensation replays, and "1" is selected with a probability of 6/10, and a probability of 3/10. "2" is selected with, and "3" is selected with a probability of 1/10.

After executing the compensation replay count lottery process in step S2106, the compensation replay count selected by the lottery process is set in the compensation replay count counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2107. The compensation replay count counter is a counter for specifying the remaining compensation replay count in the sub-side MPU 82. After that, the setting process of the added state is completed.

Here, as described above, the number of sets in the normal AT state is added according to the privilege points, but as already explained, the points that have not reached the number of sets in the privilege points are added to the front door 12. A privilege point notification unit 67 for notification and a stock notification unit 68 for notifying the number of sets in the normal AT state are provided. The light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68 according to the privilege points is executed by the notification control process in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) of the periodic process (FIG. 28).

FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the notification control process.

In the notification control process, first, in step S2201, the calculation process is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

In the following step S2202, by referring to the stock notification table stored in the sub-side ROM 83, the quotient of the calculation result of step S2201, that is, the group corresponding to the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state is specified. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41B, the stock notification table has a correspondence relationship between the display color of the stock notification unit 68 and the numerical range of the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state (the quotient of the above calculation result). It has been decided. Specifically, the number of remaining sets of 0 times corresponds to white, the number of remaining sets of 1 to 3 times corresponds to blue, and the number of remaining sets of 4 to 6 times corresponds to yellow. , The remaining set number of 7 to 9 times corresponds to green, the remaining set number of 10 to 11 times corresponds to red, and the remaining set number of 12 times or more corresponds to rainbow color.

In step S2202, it is grasped which group the quotient value derived in step S2201 belongs to in the stock notification table. Then, in step S2203, the display color data corresponding to the grasped group is read from the sub-side ROM 83 and written to the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, the stock notification unit 68 is controlled to emit light so that the display color corresponds to the display color data.

In the following step S2204, the remainder of the calculation result of the above step S2201, that is, the points for which the number of sets has not been added in the privilege points is specified. Then, by writing the light emission data corresponding to the specified point to the sub-side RAM 84, the privilege point notification unit 67 turns on the unit point display unit 67a of the number corresponding to the specified point. Light emission control is performed.

After that, in step S2205, the light emission data corresponding to the value of the win counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is written to the sub-side RAM 84, so that the unit win number display unit 69a of the number corresponding to the value of the win counter is displayed. The light emission control of the victory number notification unit 69 is performed so as to be in the lighting state. The victory counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of times the victory effect has been achieved in the battle effect in the AT state that continues without being in the non-AT state. After that, the present notification control process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 42, it will be described how the privilege points are distributed and added to the plurality of games in the pre-branch AT state. FIG. 42 (A) is a timing chart showing how the privilege points are distributed and added, FIG. 42 (a) shows the execution period of the game in which the privilege points are won, and FIG. 42 (b) shows the other games. 42 (c) shows the state of the privilege point counter, and FIG. 42 (d) shows the execution period of the additional state. Further, FIGS. 42 (B1) to 42 (B4) are explanatory views for explaining the light emitting mode of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the game in which the privilege points are won is started at the timing of t1 in the pre-branch AT state, and the game is ended at the timing of t2. In this case, in the situation where the value of the privilege point counter is already "4", 3 points are selected as the privilege points to be added, and the distribution data to be added 1 point each in 3 consecutive games including the game is set. Will be done. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the value of the privilege point counter increases by "1". As a result, as shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of the unit point display units 67a that are lit on the left side and the right side is four, as shown in FIG. 42 (B2). The number of the unit point display units 67a is five.

After that, at each of the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), when one game is completed, at each timing, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the privilege point counter The value increases by "1". As a result, in the privilege point notification unit 67, as shown in FIGS. 42 (B3) and 42 (B4), the number of unit point display units 67a that are lit on the left side and the right side is increased by one. By increasing the value of the privilege point counter in this way, the value of the privilege point counter becomes "7" at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 42 (c). As a result, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the additional state is started from the timing of t5.

Further, since the value of the privilege point counter becomes "7", the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes one, so that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed as shown in FIG. 42 (B4). , Specifically, it becomes blue. As a result, by confirming that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is blue, the player can grasp that the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more and 3 or less. Become.

Returning to the description of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38), after executing the first addition process in step S1908, the value of the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2" in step S1909. Judge whether or not. When the value of the execution target counter is "2", it means that the transition to the addition state has occurred as a result of the first addition processing in step S1908. In this case, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S1910.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the value of the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1911, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, the branch AT state setting process is executed in step S1912. Terminates the pre-branch AT state process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the branch AT state.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is 7 or more, the value of the privilege point counter is subtracted by 7 in step S2302.

In the following step S2303, the battle lottery process is executed. In the battle lottery process, the battle lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is set as described above. Match against the battle lottery table. In the battle lottery table, a victory effect and a draw effect are set as battle effects, and the probability of a win effect is halved and the probability of a draw effect is halved. ..

In the following step S2304, the value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and the flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The branch AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the branch AT state by the sub-side MPU 82, and is one of 10 to 13 games in the case of a winning effect, and 10 in the case of a draw effect. Or 11 games. In the battle lottery process, not only one of the winning effect and the drawing effect is selected, but also the number of continuous games in the case of the winning effect and the number of continuous games in the case of the draw effect.

Further, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the value set in the branch AT game counter and the data table that enables the display of the moving image corresponding to the type of battle effect are displayed on the sub side. It is read from the ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect over a plurality of games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) is performed. ) Reads the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output of the speaker 65 according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform a light emission effect and a sound output effect according to the display effect of the image display device 66.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in step S2303 is the winning effect. If the winning effect is won, the value of the winning counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added by 1 in step S2306. As described above, when the notification control process (FIG. 41 (a)) is executed and the value of the victory counter is added by 1, the unit victory in the lit state is performed by the victory number notification unit 69 accordingly. The number display unit 69a is increased by one.

In the following step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after the addition of 1 is "12". If it is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

The AT continuation probability is the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the normal AT state in the situation where the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is "0". is there. Specifically, the probabilities of winning the AT continuation are set to 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88%. The AT continuation probability initially set when shifting from the non-AT state to the normal AT state differs depending on the mode that triggered the transition to the normal AT state.

For example, in the case of transition from the transition chance state to the normal AT state, 50% is selected with a probability of 90/100 and 60% is selected with a probability of 8/100 by performing a lottery for the AT continuation probability. There is a 2/100 chance that 70% will be selected. In addition, when the number of ceiling games is exhausted and the game shifts to the normal AT state, a lottery for the AT continuation probability is performed, so that 50% is selected with a probability of 80/100 and a probability of 18/100. 60% is selected and there is a 2/100 chance that 70% will be selected. In addition, if the player wins the 2nd special replay role or the 3rd special replay role and shifts to the bonus AT state and then shifts to the normal AT state, 77% is selected, and the 1st special replay role is won and the bonus is given. 82% is selected when the AT state is entered and then the normal AT state is entered, and 88%, which is the highest probability when the bonus AT state is entered as a result of the deviation and then the normal AT state is entered. Is selected. That is, the AT continuation probability set first is higher in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the transition to the bonus AT state than in the case of directly shifting to the normal AT state.

As described above, the AT continuation probability is set at the time of transition to the normal AT state, but the victory effect occurs 12 times, which is the predetermined number of executions, in the continuous normal AT state without becoming the non-AT state. In that case, the AT continuation probability is set to 88% of the highest probability. As a result, when a victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so that the player can produce the victory effect in the battle effect. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be, and the interest of the game will be improved.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, the AT continuation lottery process is executed in step S2309. In the AT continuation lottery process, first, the AT continuation lottery table corresponding to the currently set AT continuation probability is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84. The value is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the AT continuation lottery table.

In the following step S2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the AT continuation lottery process is the AT continuation winning. If the AT is continuously won, the battle lottery process is executed in step S2311, and the value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2312. Executes the flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result. The processing contents of steps S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2303 and S2304. Further, the contents of the battle effect in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 are also the same as the contents described in the cases of step S2303 and step S2304.

In the following step S2313, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in step S2311 is the victory effect winning. If the winning effect is won, the value of the winning counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added by 1 in step S2314. Then, in step S2315, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter is "12". When the value of the victory counter is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the maximum probability in step S2308.

On the other hand, if the value of the victory counter is not "12", the process proceeds to step S2316. In step S2316, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is executed. In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is promoted as described above. Match against the lottery table. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of winning a promotion is set to be 6/10. Then, in step S2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion lottery process is promotion winning, and if it is promotion winning, the AT continuation probability is set one step higher in step S2318.

The promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is executed when the battle effect is a victory effect as described above, and is not executed when the draw effect is a draw effect. As a result, when a victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so that the player can produce the victory effect in the battle effect. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed when the normal AT state continues because the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, and when the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning. Will be executed. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, so that the player can check the progress of the battle effect with confidence. On the other hand, when the AT continuation lottery process is executed, the normal AT state can be terminated when the AT continuation is not continued, so the player confirms the progress of the battle effect while expecting that it will be a victory effect or a draw effect. Will be done. In this case, by executing the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability on the condition that the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning and the winning effect, the feeling of excitement that the AT continuation winning is achieved is further enhanced. It will be possible to improve the game, and the interest of the game will be improved.

On the other hand, if the AT continuation lottery process in step S2309 results in AT continuation failure and a negative determination is made in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, the value corresponding to the defeat effect is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and "1" is set in the defeat effect flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84.

Further, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the value set in the branch AT game counter and the data table that enables the display of the moving image corresponding to the type of battle effect are displayed on the sub side. It is read from the ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect over a plurality of games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) is performed. ) Reads the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output of the speaker 65 according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform a light emission effect and a sound output effect according to the display effect of the image display device 66.

Here, the number of games set in the branch AT game counter when the defeat effect is executed is "10". On the other hand, the number of games set in the case of the winning effect is 10 to 13 games, and the number of games set in the case of the draw effect is 10 or 11 games. The branch AT state continues for the number of games for the value set in the branch AT game counter, and during the branch AT state, the AT processing is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Then, in the winning effect or the draw effect, not only the normal AT state continues, but also the period during which the AT processing is executed can be longer than in the case of the defeat effect. As a result, the advantage of being a victory effect or a draw effect is further enhanced, and the degree of attention to the battle effect is increased.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2305, when a negative judgment is made in step S2307, when the process of step S2308 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S2313, when a negative judgment is made in step S2317, a step When the process of S2318 is executed or the process of step S2319 is executed, "1" is set in the branch AT state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2320, and the sub-side RAM 84 is executed. After setting the value of the target counter to "1", the setting process of the main branch AT state is terminated. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the branch AT state processing in step S1813 is executed.

<Processing for branch AT state>
Next, the branch AT state process executed in step S1813 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S2401, the push order avoidance process is executed. The details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, but it is for preventing an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the continuous villa in the AT state does not normally occur. It is a process.

In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, in step S2403, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed.

In the following step S2404, the battle effect data already set in the current branch AT state is stored and held in the sub-side RAM 84. In this case, the battle effect data stored in memory includes the value of the branch AT game counter set in the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812) when the current branch AT state is started, and the battle effect. The state of the flag corresponding to the type, and the control data of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 from the start game to the end game of the battle effect in the current branch AT state are included. As a result, when returning to the branch AT state after the end of the bonus AT state, it is possible to restart the battle effect of the branch AT state that was performed before the start of the bonus AT state from the start. After that, in step S2405, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the main branch AT state process is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the second addition process is executed in step S2407. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second addition process.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the privilege lottery trigger has been won. If any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 is won in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the prize lottery trigger has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the second addition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the privilege point lottery process is executed in step S2502. In the privilege point lottery process, the privilege point lottery table corresponding to the current privilege lottery trigger is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as privilege points, and the larger the value of the winning IV, the more privilege points are 1 or more. Is set so that the probability of being selected is high, and the higher the value of the winning IV is, the higher the probability of being selected as a privilege point having a larger value. Further, in the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the privilege point lottery table. To do.

In the following step S2503, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the second addition process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before is written to the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

In the following step S2505, the calculation process is executed for the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, in step S2504, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before stored in the register of the sub-side MPU 82 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

In the following step S2506, the calculation process is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

After that, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the remainder value derived by the arithmetic processing in step S2506 is smaller than the remainder value derived by the arithmetic processing in step S2505. In the configuration where the value of the privilege points that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the standard value corresponding to the above addition, the value after the addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than the value before the addition is the privilege point. It means that the privilege points having a value larger than 7 × (n-1) and smaller than 7 × n due to the addition of the counter became 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that the number of sets in the normal AT state has been added.

If a negative determination is made in step S2507, the setting process of the main addition state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the second addition process ends after setting "1" in the 1-bit addition state transition flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2508. The addition state transition flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the addition state should be shifted to the addition state after the end of the branch AT state.

Returning to the description of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), after executing the second addition process in step S2407, the value of the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 in step S2408. By the way, every time the value of the branch AT game counter is subtracted by 1, the display control data table and the light emission control data for the battle effect set this time in steps S1109 to S1111 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28). The reference range of the table and the sound output control data table is switched to the reference range corresponding to the next game. As a result, each time one game is digested, the production range of the battle effect is switched to the production range corresponding to the next game.

After that, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the branch AT game counter after 1 subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the branch AT state process is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", the branch AT state end process is executed in step S2410, and then the branch AT state process is executed. End the process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the branch AT state.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the battle effect executed this time is a defeat effect by determining whether or not "1" is set in the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84. When "1" is set in the defeat effect flag, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is less than 7, in step S2603, the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". Further, in step S2603, "1" is set in the final chance flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and "3" is set in the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, in the next process during AT (FIG. 37), the process for the final chance in step S1815 is executed. After that, the termination process of the main branch AT state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the value of the privilege point counter is subtracted by 7. In the following step S2605, the battle lottery process is executed. The processing content of the battle lottery process is the same as the processing content of step S2303 and the processing content of step S2311 in the branch AT state setting process (FIG. 43).

In the following step S2606, the value corresponding to the battle lottery result in step S2605 is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and the flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. In this case, "3" is set in the branch AT game counter so that the branch AT state is extended by 3 games when the victory effect is selected, and the branch AT state is 1 game when the draw effect is selected. Set "1" in the branch AT game counter so that it is extended.

That is, if the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected as the battle effect and the consecutive villa in the normal AT state is confirmed, the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. .. Then, in the branch AT state, the processing for AT is executed. As a result, if the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected, not only the villa in the normal AT state is confirmed but also the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. It will be advantageous for the player. Then, using this extended game, a revival effect that changes from a defeat effect to a win effect or a draw effect is executed, so that the degree of attention in the effect is also increased.

In addition, the number of continuous games extended in the branch AT state is larger when the winning effect is selected than when the draw effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage when the winning effect is selected, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the winning effect will occur.

Further, in step S2606, the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the revival flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". The revival flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the revival of the victory effect or the draw effect has occurred in the situation where the defeat effect is selected.

After that, in step S2607, the process for the winning effect is executed. In the process for the winning effect, when the winning effect is selected by the battle lottery process in the immediately preceding step S2605, the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 in the branch AT state setting process (FIG. 43) are executed. Specifically, when the winning effect is selected, the value of the winning counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter after the addition is "12". Then, when it is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability. After that, the termination process of the main branch AT state is terminated.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not "1" is set in the resurrection flag of the sub-side RAM 84, so that the defeat effect is selected. It is determined whether or not the victory effect or the draw effect has been revived. Further, in step S2609, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the addition state transition flag of the sub-side RAM 84, a privilege is provided during the branch AT state in which the victory effect or the draw effect is selected. It is determined whether or not the value of the point counter is 7 or more.

If a negative determination is made in both steps S2608 and S2609, the pre-branch AT state setting process is executed in step S2610, and then the end process of the main branch AT state is terminated.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the AT state before branching.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the battle effect finally performed in the current branch AT state is a victory effect. In the case of a winning effect, in step S2702, a lottery process for the number of continuous games at the time of the winning effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of winning production is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the number of continuous games lottery table at the time of victory production, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability of being played is 5/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is set against the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the victory effect. And collate.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2701 that it is a draw effect, in step S2703, a lottery process for the number of continuous games at the time of the draw effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the number of continuous games lottery table at the time of draw production, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 3/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 5/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability of being played is 2/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is set against the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect. And collate.

When the process of step S2702 or step S2703 is executed, the value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2702 or the lottery process of step S2703 in step S2704 is set to the normal AT game of the sub-side RAM 84. Set to the counter. After that, in step S2705, the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state processing in step S1812 is executed. After that, the setting process of the AT state before the main branch is terminated.

Returning to the description of the end processing of the branch AT state (FIG. 46), if an affirmative determination is made in step S2608 or step S2609, the processing of steps S261 to S2614 is executed. In step S2611, "1" is set in the additional state of the sub-side RAM 84, and the branch AT state flag is cleared to "0". In the following step S2612, "2" is set in the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. When "2" is set in the execution target counter, the process for the additional state of step S1814 is executed in the next process during AT (FIG. 37).

After that, the lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed in step S2613, and the process for setting the compensation replay number counter is executed in step S2614, and then the end process of the main branch AT state is terminated. The processing contents of steps S2613 and S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2106 and S2107 in the addition state setting process (FIG. 40).

<Progress mode of branch AT state>
Next, a mode of progress of the branched AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 48. FIG. 48 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a progress mode of the branch AT state, and FIGS. 48 (B1) to 48 (B6) are diagrams simply showing the contents of the battle effect in the image display device 66.

When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends and the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST42), the victory effect (ST43) or the draw effect (ST44) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state will be in a row, and the state before branching (ST45) will be restored. In addition, before shifting to the pre-branch state (ST45), it is possible to shift to the additional state or the bonus AT state.

If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST51) when the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends, the AT continuation lottery process (ST52) is executed. As a result, if the AT is continuously won, the victory effect (ST53) or the draw effect (ST54) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state will be in a row, and the state before branching (ST45) will be restored. In addition, before shifting to the pre-branch state (ST45), it is possible to shift to the additional state or the bonus AT state. On the other hand, if the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) results in a continuous loss, the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect.

Here, the contents of the battle effect will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 48 (B1) to (B6).

In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are displayed on the image display device 66. In the battle production, the video will be displayed in each game, but if the pre-switching display content specified in each game is reached, the pre-switching display content will be displayed until the next game is started. The display of the still image is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B2), only the ally character CH1 is displayed, and further, as shown in FIG. 48 (B3), only the enemy character CH2 is displayed. After that, the state of the battle between both characters CH1 and CH2 is displayed as a moving image. Then, in the case of the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B4), the appearance of the ally character CH1 winning over the enemy character CH2 is displayed, and in the case of the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B5). , The appearance that both the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are standing up is displayed, and in the case of the defeat effect, the appearance that the ally character CH1 is defeated by the enemy character CH2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (B6). To.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 48 (A), when the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) is continuously out of order and the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect, the value of the privilege point counter is 7 at the end of the defeat effect. It is determined whether or not the above is achieved. If the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST61), the resurrection victory effect (ST62) or the resurrection draw effect (ST63) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is in a row, and the state before branching (ST64) is restored after the additional state is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST65), the process shifts to the final chance state (ST66).

With the above configuration, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the consecutive villas in the normal AT state are confirmed, and even if the number of remaining sets is "0", the AT continuation lottery process will continue to win. By doing so, the normal AT state will be in a row. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the normal AT state will stay in a row.

In addition, even if the AT continuation lottery process results in continuous loss, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branch AT state, and the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes 1 or more, so that the normal AT state changes. It will be a series of villas. As a result, even if a defeat effect occurs in the branched AT state, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the normal AT state.

In addition, even if the AT continuation lottery process results in a continuous loss, if the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branch AT state and the normal AT state continues, the subsequent branch AT state starts. If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7, the AT continuation lottery process is executed again. As a result, the opportunity to execute the AT continuation lottery process is secured before the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the normal AT state will continue.

<AT continuation probability is being promoted>
Next, how the AT continuation probability in the AT continuation lottery process is promoted will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 49.

As described above, six types of AT continuation probabilities are set: 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88%. When shifting to the normal AT state via the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is any of 77%, 82%, and 88%. On the other hand, when directly shifting to the normal AT state without going through the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is basically 50%.

In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning, the battle lottery process results in the winning production, and the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process results in the promotion winning, the AT continuation probability increases by one level. .. That is, 50% is 60%, 60% is 70%, 70% is 77%, 77% is 82%, and 82% is 88%. As a result, the more the normal AT state stays in a row, the higher the probability that the AT continuation probability becomes, and the easier it is for the normal AT state to stay in a row. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of having a continuous villa in the normal AT state.

In addition, when the winning effect occurs 12 times in the normal AT state without intervening the non-AT state, the AT continuation probability is the highest probability regardless of which probability the AT continuation probability at that time is. There is 88%. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a winning effect will occur in the battle effect, and the interest in the game will be improved by increasing the attention to the battle effect.

Here, when there are two opportunities, the remaining set number and the AT continuous lottery process, as the opportunity for the normal AT state to stay in a row, the normal AT state is triggered by the remaining set number being 1 or more. Even if the game continues, the battle lottery process may be executed and a winning effect may occur. Then, when the winning effect occurs 12 times, the AT continuation probability of the AT continuation lottery process becomes the highest probability. As a result, when there are two opportunities, the number of remaining sets and the AT continuation lottery process, as opportunities for the normal AT state to stay in a row, both opportunities are set as to whether or not the AT continuation probability is the highest probability. It can be closely related.

Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a stock notification unit 68 for notifying the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state. In the stock notification unit 68, the display color is usually changed according to the number of remaining sets in the AT state, so the player can grasp how many times the remaining sets are set by checking the display color. It is possible to do. As a result, by checking the stock notification unit 68 and grasping the number of remaining sets, the player himself can determine the degree of expectation that the AT continuation probability will be the highest probability in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect. Will be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the AT continuation probability will be the highest probability.

Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a winning number notification unit 69 for notifying the number of winning effects. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the number of winning effects by checking the winning number notification unit 69.

<Transition timing of additional state>
Next, the timing of transition to the pre-branch AT state and the additional state in the branch AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 50 (a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 50 (b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 50 (c) shows the execution period of the additional state, and FIG. 50 (d). Indicates the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the pre-branch AT state is started at the timing of t1, and as a result of each game in the pre-branch AT state, the privilege points are shown at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 50 (d). The value of the counter is 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). As a result, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (a), and the additional state starts as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the pre-branch AT state, the addition state is entered when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more.

After that, at the timing of t3, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (c), and the state returns to the pre-branch AT state as shown in FIG. 50 (a). In this case, the AT state before branching is restored with the number of continuous games remaining before the transition to the additional state.

After that, at the timing of t4, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (a), and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Then, as a result of each game in the branch AT state, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 50 (d). However, at the timing of t5, the branch AT state does not end as shown in FIG. 50 (b).

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the branch AT state ends, the additional state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the branch AT state, the addition state does not shift to the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, and the addition state shifts to the addition state at the end of the branch AT state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the battle effect from becoming complicated.

After that, at the timing of t7, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (c), and the pre-branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50 (a).

<Processing for additional state>
Next, the addition state process executed in step S1814 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

In step S2801, the push order avoidance process is executed. The details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, but it is for preventing an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the continuous villa in the AT state does not normally occur. It is a process.

In the following step S2802, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, in step S2803, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed. After that, in step S2804, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the process for the addition state is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for adding the book is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2806.

In step S2806, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery trigger has been won. If any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 is won in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the prize lottery trigger has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, in step S2807, the current additional mode and the additional lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of the current game are read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the addition lottery table, "0", "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of additions. Further, as the addition mode, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52A, the first addition mode, the second addition mode, and the third addition mode are set, and are set when the addition state is entered. In the first addition mode to be performed, the addition probability is the lowest, and even when the addition occurs, a small number of additions can be easily selected. Further, in the second addition mode that can be shifted from the first addition mode, the addition probability is higher than that in the first addition mode, and when an addition occurs, a larger number of additions than in the first addition mode is selected. Easy to do. In addition, the third addition mode, which can be transferred from the first addition mode or the second addition mode, has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, and when an addition occurs, the number of times is larger than that in the second addition mode. The number of additions is easy to select. In relation to the winning combination, the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability of addition, and the larger the value of the winning IV, the greater the number of additions. It is set so that the probability of being selected is high.

In the following step S2808, the additional lottery process is executed. In the additional lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the additional lottery table.

In the following step S2809, it is determined whether or not the result of the additional lottery process is the additional winning. In the case of additional winning, in step S2810, 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter. In this case, n is the number of additions of 1 or more selected in the addition lottery process.

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52B, the privilege point counter has a data amount of 1 byte. To the privilege point counter, a value less than the privilege standard value (specifically, "7") is added when the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. Is. In addition, the bonus reference value is added to the bonus point counter when the bonus AT state is set and the number of remaining sets is added once, and the number of remaining sets is increased n times (n) by the additional lottery process in the additional state. Is an integer of 1 or more) When adding, the value of the bonus reference value x n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. That is, the privilege point counter is used not only as a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the privilege reference value, but also as a counter for adding a value when adding the remaining number of sets. As a result, the number of counters can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a counter for cumulatively adding values less than the privilege reference value and a counter for measuring the number of remaining sets are separately provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in a configuration in which data is handled in byte units.

In addition, a value less than the privilege standard value is cumulatively added to the privilege point counter, and a value of the privilege standard value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added, and the number of remaining sets is one or more. In this situation, when a continuous villa in the normal AT state occurs, the privilege reference value is subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, it becomes possible to centrally handle the numerical value related to the addition of the remaining set number in the privilege point counter. Therefore, for example, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the privilege point counter and the counter for the remaining set count are separately provided and the counter for the remaining set count is added according to the value of the privilege point counter. It is planned.

Returning to the description of the additional state process (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S2809, or if the process of step S2810 is executed, the mode UP lottery process is executed in step S2811. In the mode UP lottery process, the mode UP lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub ROM 83. For example, in the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode, the UP winning result to the second addition mode, the UP winning result to the third addition mode, and the loss result are set, and the second addition mode is set. In the mode UP lottery table in, the UP winning result to the third addition mode and the losing result are set. Further, in the mode UP lottery table in the third addition mode, the status quo winning result is set as the mode UP winning, and the status quo loss result is set as the loss result. Further, the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode and the second addition mode is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV is, the higher the mode UP probability is. Further, in the mode UP lottery process, the value of the sub side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub side lottery counter is collated with the mode UP lottery table. To do.

In the following step S2812, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode UP lottery process is the mode UP winning. If the mode UP is not won, the processing for the main addition state is terminated as it is, and if the mode UP is won, the process proceeds to step S2813. In step S2813, a process for changing the addition mode to a mode one step higher or two steps higher is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52A, the mode is changed to the second addition mode or the third addition mode in the case of the first addition mode, and the third addition mode is changed in the case of the second addition mode. If it is the third addition mode, the third addition mode is maintained.

After that, in step S2814, the lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed. As described above, in the additional state, the addition of the set number of times in the normal AT state is likely to occur, but the additional state ends when the normal replay winning occurs in the compensation replay number of times. The lottery process for the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays that triggers the end of the additional state by lottery.

In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. , The value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table in the first addition mode, "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of compensation replays, and "1" is selected with a probability of 6/10, and 3/10. "2" is selected with a probability, and "3" is selected with a probability of 1/10. In the compensation replay lottery table in the second addition mode, "1" is selected with a probability of 3/10, "2" is selected with a probability of 5/10, and "3" is selected with a probability of 2/10. To. In the compensation replay lottery table in the third addition mode, "1" is selected with a probability of 1/10, "2" is selected with a probability of 3/10, and "3" is selected with a probability of 6/10. To. That is, the second addition mode not only has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, but also has a large number of selections of compensation replay. Further, the third addition mode not only has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, but also has a large number of selections of compensation replay.

After executing the compensation replay count lottery process in step S2814, the compensation replay count selected by the lottery process is added to the compensation replay count counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2815. After that, the setting process of the added state is completed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the normal replay combination has been won. If the normal replay combination has not been won, the processing for the addition state is terminated as it is, and if the normal replay combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S2817.

In step S2817, the value of the compensation replay count counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and in the subsequent step S2818, it is determined whether or not the value of the compensation replay count counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the process for adding the book is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S2819.

In step S2819, by determining whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0", whether or not the current additional state has shifted in the middle of the pre-branch AT state. To judge. When the value of the normal AT game counter is "0", it means that the added state of this time has changed at the end of the branch AT state. Therefore, a step is taken to newly start the pre-branch AT state. After executing the pre-branch AT state setting process in S2820, the additional state process is terminated. The processing content of the pre-branch AT state setting processing is the same as the processing content shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47. However, in step S2705, instead of clearing the branch AT state flag by "0", the additional state flag is cleared by "0".

If the value of the normal AT game counter is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S2819, and the process proceeds to step S2821. In step S2821, after clearing the addition state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 by "0" and clearing the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 by "0", the processing for the addition state is completed. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state processing in step S1812 is executed.

<Processing for final chance>
Next, the final chance process executed in step S1815 of the process during AT (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2901, the push order avoidance process is executed. The details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, but it is for preventing an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the continuous villa in the AT state does not normally occur. It is a process.

In the following step S2902, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, in step S2903, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4", and the sub Clear the final chance flag of the side RAM 84 to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed. After that, in step S2904, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the final chance processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for adding the book is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2906.

In step S2906, the revival lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of this game and the value of the current privilege point counter is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The revival lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the revival winning probability, and the larger the value of the current privilege point counter, the higher the revival winning probability. Has been done.

In the following step S2907, the revival lottery process is executed. In the resurrection lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the resurrection lottery table.

In the following step S2908, it is determined whether or not the result of the resurrection lottery process is the resurrection winning. If the revival is won, in step S2909, the continuous game number lottery process at the time of revival is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of resurrection is read from the sub ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the number of continuous games lottery table at the time of resurrection, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 4/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 3/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability is 3/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is set with respect to the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the revival. Match. Then, in step S2910, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2909 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

After that, in step S2911, the final chance flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state processing in step S1812 is executed. Further, in step S2911, the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". After that, the processing for this final chance is completed.

By clearing the privilege point counter "0" when the revival is won in the revival lottery process, the value of the privilege point counter that contributed to the revival winning will be further used in the normal AT state of the subsequent villa destination. Is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to limit the generation of profits from the privilege points.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not the extension trigger has been won. If any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 is won in the lottery table for the internal rear state (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the extension trigger. If the extension trigger has not been won, various clear processes are executed in step S2913. In various clearing processes, the final chance flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the normal AT state ends. Also, the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the privilege point counter is inherited between sets when the normal AT state is in a row, but when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes "0" and the state shifts to the non-AT state. It cannot be taken over. Also, the victory counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the victory counter is inherited between sets when the normal AT state is in a row, while it is inherited when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes "0" and the state shifts to the non-AT state. I can't.

After that, after executing the lottery process for the number of ceiling games in step S2914, the final chance process is completed. In the lottery process for the number of ceiling games, the ceiling game lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the sub-side lottery counter is read. The value of is collated with the above ceiling game lottery table. Then, the value selected in the lottery process for the number of ceiling games is set in the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

If it is determined in step S2912 that the extension trigger has been won, the final chance processing is terminated as it is. As a result, the final chance state will continue. In other words, even if the revival lottery process does not result in a revival winning despite winning the extension trigger in the final chance state, the final chance status will continue as a benefit of winning the extension trigger. Become. If the extension trigger is won in the final chance state, the resurrection lottery process will be executed in a manner with a high probability of winning the resurrection, but the resurrection was not won even though the extension trigger was won. In that case, the player may be discouraged by that amount. On the other hand, if you win the extension trigger, the final chance state will be extended, so you can suppress the disappointment if you do not win the revival even though you won the extension trigger. It will be possible.

<Processing for bonus AT>
Next, the bonus AT process executed in step S1816 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

In step S3001, the push order avoidance process is executed. The details of the push order avoidance process will be described later, but it is for preventing an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the continuous villa in the AT state does not normally occur. It is a process.

In the following step S3002, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT end command indicating that the bonus AT count counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" has been received from the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 sends a bonus AT end command when one set of bonus AT states ends even if the bonus AT count counter is not set to "0". In this case, step S3002 Do not make an affirmative judgment at.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the processing for this bonus AT is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

In the following step S3004, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the addition state flag of the sub-side RAM 84. When "1" is set in the addition state flag, it means that the series of bonus AT states ended this time has shifted in the middle of the addition state. Therefore, in step S3005, the execution target counter is set. After setting the value to "2", the processing for this bonus AT ends. As a result, in the next process during AT (FIG. 37), the process for the additional state of step S1814 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3004, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not "1" is set in the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84. When "1" is set in the branch AT state flag, it means that the series of bonus AT states ended this time has shifted in the middle of the branch AT state, so the execution target is in step S3007. After setting the value of the counter to "1", the processing for this bonus AT ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the branch AT state processing in step S1813 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not "1" is set in the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84. When "1" is set in the normal AT flag, it means that the series of bonus AT states ended this time has shifted in the middle of the pre-branch AT state, so the execution target is in step S3009. After clearing the value of the counter to "0", the processing for this bonus AT ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state processing in step S1812 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3008, it is determined in step S3010 whether or not "1" is set in the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84. If a negative determination is made in step S3010, "1" is set in the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3011. In the following step S3012, the continuous game number lottery process after the bonus is executed.

In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table after the bonus is read from the sub ROM 83. As already described, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the number of continuous games lottery table after the bonus, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 2/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability is 7/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is set with respect to the continuous game number lottery table after the bonus. Match.

When the process of step S3012 is executed, the value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S3012 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3013. After that, in step S3014, after clearing the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 to "0", the processing for this bonus AT ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state processing in step S1812 is executed.

On the other hand, when the penalty AT flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S3010, and the processing for this bonus AT is terminated as it is. As a result, even if the bonus AT state is entered in the penalty situation, the normal AT state is not changed after the end of the bonus AT state.

<External output from slot machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, the configuration of the external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic view for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of the game hall in which a large number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 55 (b) is an external terminal plate 90 provided in the slot machine 10. It is a front view of.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of slot machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. Further, in the island equipment S, a data counter DC is installed so as to correspond one-to-one with each slot machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10, and has a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times the game has been executed and a second display for displaying the number of times a predetermined game state has been executed. A unit DC2 and a third display unit DC3 for displaying the number of executions of a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state are provided.

A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as a management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202, information input from the slot machine 10, and the like are temporarily stored in the MPU 201. It is provided with a RAM 203, which is a memory for storing the data.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1 and is electrically connected to each data counter DC through the electric wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10 is executed, and the signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

Here, the configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the external terminal plate 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information output externally to the hall computer HC are different.

Specifically, in order to output the external terminal 90a for the input signal used for outputting the information indicating the number of bets of the game for each game and the information indicating the number of medals given in each game. The external terminal 90b for the imparting signal used for the first game state signal, the external terminal 90c for the first game state signal used for outputting the information indicating that the first game state has been started, and the second game state are started. The external terminal 90d for the second game state signal used to output the information indicating that the third game state has been started, and the third game state signal used to output the information indicating that the third game state has been started. The external terminal 90e, the external terminal 90f for an abnormality signal used to output information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected an illegal occurrence such as an input abnormality or a payout abnormality, and a setting change operation are being executed. The external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal used to output the information indicating that the front door 12 is open, and the external terminal 90h for the opening signal used to output the information indicating that the front door 12 is open. include.

Of these, a number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets are output from the external terminal 90a for the input signal. For example, when the specified number of bets is "2", a pulse signal is output twice so that the ON time and the OFF time are 50 msec each at the start of one game, and the specified number of bets is "2". In the case of "3", the pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the start of one game. The hall computer HC determines that one game has started by receiving a group of pulse signals from the external terminal 90a for the input signal, and displays the number of times the game has been executed on the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Is added by 1.

From the external terminal 90b for the imparting signal, a number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of payouts are output. For example, when 9 medals are given, a pulse signal is output 9 times so that the ON time and the OFF time are 50 msec each at the end of one game, and 4 medals are given. Is output four times with a pulse signal so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game.

The external terminal 90c for the first game state signal is used in the slot machine 10 to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of times the normal AT state is executed. Hereinafter, the first game state signal is referred to as an AT1 signal, and the external terminal 90c for the first game state signal is referred to as an external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the normal AT state has been newly started by confirming the rising edge of the signal from the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal, and executes the normal AT state on the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC. The display of the number of times is added by 1.

The external terminal 90d for the second game state signal is used in the slot machine 10 to make the number of executions of the bonus AT state recognizable by the hall computer HC. Hereinafter, the second game state signal is referred to as an AT2 signal, and the external terminal 90d for the second game state signal is referred to as an external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the bonus AT state has been newly started by confirming the rising edge of the signal from the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal, and executes the bonus AT state on the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC. The display of the number of times is added by 1.

The external terminal 90e for the third game state signal is used in the slot machine 10 to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of executions of the CB state. From the external terminal 90f for the abnormal signal, the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal, and the external terminal 90h for the open signal, the ON state is maintained while each target event occurs.

The external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal may be configured to output an ON signal not only during the operation of changing the setting but also during the operation of confirming the current set value. Further, both the abnormality signal and the setting operation signal may be output from one external terminal.

The main MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electrical wiring group EL3, and has a predetermined voltage connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h according to the processing result. Output a signal.

<Processing for external output executed by the main MPU 72>
Next, the processing for external output executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. However, in the following description, processing for external output through the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal and the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal in the external terminal plate 90 will be described.

First, the external output setting process at the end will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. The external output setting process at the end is executed in step S216 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not it is in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. When it is not in the CB internal post-state or CB in-progress state, that is, in the CB non-internal state, the AT1 signal output state is set to the OFF state in step S3102, and the AT2 signal output state is set in step S3103. After setting to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of this operation is terminated.

That is, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are not set to the ON state in the CB non-internal state, but can be set to the ON state in the CB internal rear state or the CB middle state. As a result, in the hall computer HC, by confirming that the AT1 signal or the AT2 signal is in the ON state, it is possible not only to confirm whether or not it is in the normal AT state or the bonus AT state, but also in the CB. It is possible to confirm that it is in the internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. In this case, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with an internal state notification unit 63 for notifying that the CB winning flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag is set to "1". Is set, the internal state notification unit 63 goes into a light emitting state without waiting for the end of the game. On the other hand, the setting of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal to the ON state is performed after the end of the game in which the CB winning flag is set to "1". As a result, the slot machine 10 notifies that the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state is in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state at a timing before the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state is output to the hall computer HC externally. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which only the administrator of the game hall grasps the state after the inside of the CB or the state during the CB, and the player cannot grasp it.

If the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state and an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more. The bell winning counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred in the main MPU 72 without causing a push order loss when the first bell winning or the second bell winning is won. Is.

<Relationship between bell winning and AT1 signal output status>
Here, the bell winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. The bell winning determination process is executed in step S607 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

In the bell winning determination process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the AT2 signal is in the ON state. When a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won in this game. If both the 1st bell combination and the 2nd bell combination have not been won, the main bell winning determination process is terminated as it is, and if the 1st bell combination or the 2nd bell combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S3203. ..

In step S3203, it is determined whether or not it is confirmed that the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred as a result of the logical operation processing of the symbol combination in step S604 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18). When the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred, in step S3204, the value of the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1, and the bell off flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0". After clearing, the bell winning judgment process ends. When both the first bell winning and the second bell winning have not occurred, in step S3205, "1" is set to the bell off flag of the main RAM 74, and the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". After clearing "0", the bell winning determination process ends. The bell-off flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that neither the first bell prize nor the second bell prize has occurred in the situation where the first bell role or the second bell role is won.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3201 that the AT2 signal is in the ON state, the value of the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3206. After that, the bell winning determination process is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process (FIG. 56) at the end, if it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is 3 or more, the AT1 signal is transmitted in step S3105. Set the output status to the ON status.

When a negative determination is made in step S3104, or when the process of step S3105 is executed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not "1" is set in the bell-off flag of the main RAM 74. When the bell-off flag is set to "1", the AT1 signal output state is set to the OFF state in step S3107, and the bell-off flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in the following step S3108. ..

With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 58, a state in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination will be described.

FIG. 58 (a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 58 (b) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 58 (c) shows the execution of the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won. The period is shown, FIG. 58 (d) shows the occurrence status of the first bell winning or the second bell winning, and FIG. 58 (e) shows the execution period of other games.

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started at the timing of t1 and the timing of t2, which are neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state. .. However, since it is not in the AT state, the push order notification control for generating the bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the bell winning does not occur.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58A, the sub-side MPU 82 is set to shift to the normal AT state, so that the normal AT state is started. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), a new game is started, but since the game is not a game in which the first bell role or the second bell role is won, any of the bells is used. No prizes will be awarded. However, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started at the timing of t4 and the timing of t6 in the normal AT state. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the push order notification control for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated at each of the timing of t5 and the timing of t7. However, at this timing, the value of the bell winning counter is "2" and is not 3 or more, so that the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state as shown in FIG. 58 (b).

Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), after the game in which neither the first bell combination nor the second bell combination is won is started, at the timing of t9 after the end of the game. , As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the push order notification control for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Therefore, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated. As a result, when the value of the bell winning counter becomes 3 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 58 (b).

After that, at the timing of t11 and the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started, and the bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated. To do. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the final game in the normal AT state ends, and as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the end setting of the normal AT state is set in the sub-side MPU 82. Will be done. However, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the AT1 signal remains in the ON state.

After that, at the timing of t14, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started. In this case, since it is not in the AT state, the push order notification control for generating the bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Further, in order to generate the first bell winning or the second bell winning, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, whereas in either the normal AT state or the bonus AT state. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in no situation, a penalty event will occur. Then, there is a high possibility that the bell winning will not occur in the game started at the timing of t14. Then, even though the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the corresponding bell prize does not occur, so that "1" is set in the bell release flag of the main RAM 74 at the timing of t15, and the AT1 signal is displayed. Is turned off.

The processing load of the main MPU 72 can be reduced by allowing the sub MPU 82 to independently perform the transition setting to the normal AT state and the end setting. Further, by making the communication between the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 one-way communication from the main MPU 72 to the sub MPU 82, the chance of inputting an illegal signal to the main MPU 72 is reduced. Further, by configuring the main MPU 72 to output externally to the hall computer HC, it is possible to directly control the external output in the main MPU 72 that controls the progress of the game.

In this case, the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal AT state when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times (specifically, three times) without intervening the push order when the bell role is won. Is determined, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. With such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the transition to the normal AT state and outputs a signal indicating the normal AT state to the outside. Can be done.

The main MPU 72 determines that the normal AT state has ended and sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state when the push order is out of order when the bell is won. With such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the end of the normal AT state and outputs an external signal indicating that the normal AT state is in the normal AT state. It can be terminated.

Both the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state are whether or not a bell prize has occurred at the time of winning the bell. As a result, the monitoring process for setting the ON state of the AT1 signal and the monitoring process for setting the OFF state of the AT1 signal can be shared, and the processing load can be reduced.

The number of bell winning occurrences at the time of bell winning required when setting the AT1 signal to the ON state is set to be larger than the number of bell non-winning occurrences at the time of bell winning required when setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state. .. As a result, regarding the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, priority is given to setting the AT1 signal to the ON state under the actual normal AT state rather than performing the setting process at an early stage, and regarding the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state. Is able to prioritize the early setting process to the OFF state rather than being set to the OFF state when the normal AT state is actually finished. Therefore, it is possible to set the AT1 signal to the OFF state at an early stage while carefully setting the AT1 signal to the ON state.

When setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state, not only the first bell prize but also the second bell prize is monitored. This makes it possible to increase the trigger for setting the ON state and the trigger for setting the OFF state.

In the bonus AT state, even if a bell winning occurs, the bell winning counter is not added. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state during the bonus AT state.

In both the first bell winning and the second bell winning, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state in a situation other than the non-AT state.

<Relationship between normal replay combination and AT1 signal output state>
Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process (FIG. 56) at the end, when a negative determination is made in step S3106 or the process of step S3108 is executed, the main RAM 74 is provided in step S3109. It is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more. The push order correct answer counter is for specifying the number of times each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped by the main MPU 72 in the push order determined by the lottery when the normal replay combination is won. It is a counter. The push order lottery process when the normal replay combination is won is executed in step S405 in the winning data acquisition process (FIG. 16) as described above.

Here, the normal replay push order determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59. The normal replay push order determination process is executed in step S608 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

In the normal replay push order determination process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in this game. As already explained, when the normal replay combination is won, the operation in relation to the stop operation order of each stop button 42 to 44 and the rotation position of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R of each stop button 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, a normal replay prize will occur.

If the normal replay prize has not occurred, the normal replay push order determination process is terminated as it is, and if the normal replay prize has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, the result of the push order lottery process (step S405) executed at the start of this game is read from the main RAM 74. In the following step S3303, the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this game is read out. Then, in step S3304, it is determined whether or not the result read in step S3302 and the result read out in step S3303 match. That is, it is determined whether or not each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 in step S3305, and then the normal replay push order determination process ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0" in step S3306. After clearing, this normal replay push order determination process ends. The set flag specifies on the main MPU 72 whether or not the processing corresponding to the value of the push order correct answer counter being 2 or more is already executed in the situation where the AT1 signal is ON. It is a flag for.

Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process (FIG. 56) at the end, when it is determined in step S3109 that the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on in step S3110. In addition to determining whether or not, in step S3111, it is determined whether or not the value of the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is "1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110 and a negative determination is made in step S3111, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3112. In the following step S3113, the consecutive villa wait time (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the weight counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, a negative determination is made in step S218 of the normal process (FIG. 11), and a wait time corresponding to the consecutive villa wait time is generated at the end of this game. Further, in step S3113, "1" is set in the set flag of the main RAM 74. After that, in step S3114, the consecutive villa wait command is set to be transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, as described above, the sub-side MPU 82 sets the flag for the consecutive villa weight to "1" in step S1210 of the standby effect setting process (FIG. 29), and the sub-side MPU 82 is stationary corresponding to the consecutive villa wait time. The image is displayed on the image display device 66.

When the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more as described above, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. The setting process is executed in the external output setting process at the start in step S210 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process at the start.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not it is in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. If it is not in the CB internal post-state or CB in-progress state, that is, in the CB non-internal state, the external output setting process at the start of this operation is terminated as it is.

In the case of the CB internal rear state or the CB middle state, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is 2 or more. If it is 2 or more, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the AT2 signal is in the ON state. If the AT2 signal is not in the ON state, the AT1 signal is set in the ON state in step S3404.

As described above, when the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more in the situation where the AT1 signal is ON and the AT2 signal is OFF, the AT1 signal is at the end of the game when the value is 2 or more. Is set to the OFF state, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state again at the start of the next game that is started after the consecutive villa wait time (1 sec) has elapsed. Such an AT1 signal setting process is executed in order to make the hall computer HC grasp the number of execution sets of the normal AT state when the normal AT state is consecutively occupied. However, since it is not possible for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the normal AT state is continuous, the AT1 signal is set to OFF / ON at the timing when the normal AT state is generated. As described above, the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process are executed on the sub-side MPU 82. These normal replay processing and push order avoidance processing will be described below.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a normal replay process in the sub-side MPU 82. The normal replay process is executed in step S1901 of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38).

In the normal replay process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, in step S3502, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command of this time includes data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is included, in step S3503, by grasping the content of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command, the push order lottery in the main MPU 72 is performed. The push order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written to the sub RAM 84.

In the following step S3504, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag after the consecutive villas provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The post-sequential flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the normal AT state has been consecutive. The timing at which "1" is set in the post-branch flag is when the victory effect or the draw effect is executed in the branch AT state and the state returns to the pre-branch AT state, the additional state shifted after the end of the branch AT state ends. In this case, the player returns to the pre-branch AT state, and in the final chance state, the player wins the revival in the revival lottery process (step S2907) and returns to the pre-branch AT state.

When "1" is set in the flag after the consecutive villas, the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is set as the push order data to be notified by the image display device 66 in step S3505. As a result, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. When the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the AT state, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, , Each stop button 42 to 44 is operated in the order selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pushing order, the replay winning is usually generated.

If "1" is not set in the flag after the consecutive villas, it is determined in step S3506 whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The push order correct answer counter determines the number of times each stop button 42 to 44 is operated in the mode selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay combination is won. It is a counter for specifying in.

When the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3507, as push order data for notifying the image display device 66 of push order data different from the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503. Set. As a result, a push order different from the push order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. When the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the AT state, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, , The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pushing order, the replay winning is usually generated.

When a negative judgment is made in step S3501, a negative judgment is made in step S3502, a negative judgment is made in step S3506, a process of step S3505 is executed, or a process of step S3507 is executed. , In step S3508, it is determined whether or not the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the normal replay process is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3509, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in this game. If the normal replay prize has not occurred, the normal replay process is terminated as it is, and if the normal replay prize has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not the push order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual push order in the current game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added by 1 in step S3511. In the following step S3512, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more. If it is not 2 or more, the normal replay process is terminated as it is, and if it is 2 or more, after clearing the post-sequential flag of the sub-side RAM 84 to "0" in step S3513, this normal End the replay process. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, the normal replay process ends after clearing "0" in the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3514.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a push order avoidance process in the sub-side MPU 82. The push order avoidance process includes step S2401 of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), step S2801 of the additional state process (FIG. 51), step S2901 of the final chance process (FIG. 53), and bonus AT process (FIG. 53). It is executed in step S3001 of FIG. 54).

In the push order avoidance process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command this time includes data corresponding to the winning of the normal replay combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is included, the push order lottery in the main MPU 72 is performed by grasping the content of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command in step S3603. The push order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written to the sub RAM 84.

In the following step S3604, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, the push order data different from the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3603 is notified on the image display device 66 as the push order data in step S3605. Set. As a result, a push order different from the push order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. When the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the AT state, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, , The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pushing order, the replay winning is usually generated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3601, a negative judgment is made in step S3602, a negative judgment is made in step S3604, or the process of step S3605 is executed, the main MPU72 is made in step S3606. It is determined whether or not the winning result command is received from. If the winning result command has not been received, the push order avoidance process is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3607.

In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in this game. If the normal replay prize has not occurred, the normal replay process is terminated as it is, and if the normal replay prize has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the push order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual push order in the current game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added by 1 in step S3609. After that, the normal replay process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3608, the normal replay process ends after clearing "0" in the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3610.

By executing the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process as described above, in the pre-branch AT state after the villa in the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 determines in the game in which the normal replay combination is won. The pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the push order notification, the push order is correct. Therefore, the main MPU 72 executes a process of temporarily turning the AT1 signal into the OFF state and then setting it to the ON state again. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the situation where the AT state is not before branching after the villa in the normal AT state, the pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined by the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay role is won is different. It is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the push order notification, the push order will not be correct in a situation other than the pre-branch AT state after the villa in the normal AT state. The process of setting the signal to the ON state again after turning it to the OFF state is not executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which when the correct push order occurs multiple times, the main MPU 72 temporarily turns the AT1 signal into the OFF state and then sets it to the ON state again, before branching after the villa in the normal AT state. In a situation other than the AT state, the notification control of the push order different from the correct push order is executed on condition that the correct push order has occurred at least once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the push order notification is performed when the normal replay combination is won, and it is possible to suppress that the push order notification continues to be executed meaninglessly in the AT state. ..

With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 63, a state in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay combination will be described.

63 (a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 63 (b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 63 (c) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 63 (d) shows. Shows the execution period of the normal replay winning game, FIG. 63 (e) shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 63 (f) shows the execution period of the correct answer push order notification, and FIG. 63 (g) shows the non-execution period. The execution period of the correct answer push order notification is shown, FIG. 63 (h) shows the setting status of the push order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 63 (i) shows the setting status of the consecutive villa wait time.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), at each of the timing of t1 and the timing of t2 in the pre-branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started. In this case, since it is not normally after the villa in the AT state, the correct answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is "0", the incorrect answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (g). However, in the game started at the timing of t2, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 happens to be the correct answer, and at the timing of t3, which is the end timing of the game, as shown in FIG. 63 (h). The value of the push order correct answer counter is "1". Further, at the timing of t3, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 63 (b).

After that, at the timing of t4 in the branch AT state, a game different from the normal replay winning combination is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and at the timing of t5 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (d). The game that won the normal replay role is started. In this case, since the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the incorrect answer push order notification is executed at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 63 (g). Will be done. As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect pressing order, and at the timing of t6, which is the end timing of the game, the pressing order correct answer counter is set to "0" as shown in FIG. 63 (h). It will be cleared.

After that, at the timing of t7 in the branch AT state, the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). In this case, since it is not normally after the villa in the AT state, the correct answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is "0", the incorrect answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (g). Therefore, in the game started at the timing of t7, the push order is incorrect.

After that, at the timing of t8, the other games are terminated as shown in FIG. 63 (e), so that the branch AT state is terminated as shown in FIG. 63 (b) and the branch AT state is terminated and shown in FIG. 63 (a). The pre-branch AT state is started as described above.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started. In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the consecutive villas in the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct pressing order, and at the timing of t10, which is the end timing of the game, the value of the pressing order correct answer counter is added by 1 as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Will be done.

After that, at the timing of t11, other games are executed as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and then at the timing of t12, the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). .. In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the consecutive villas in the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct pressing order, and at the timing of t13, the value of the pressing order correct answer counter is added by 1 as shown in FIG. 63 (h). As a result, the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes "2", so that the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the consecutive villa wait time is set as shown in FIG. 63 (i). Measurement is started. Then, the waiting time of the consecutive villa elapses at the timing of t14. After that, at the timing of t15, another game is started as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 63 (c) accordingly.

After that, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started. In this case, since it is not normally after the villa in the AT state, the correct answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is "2", the incorrect answer push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (g). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect pressing order, and at the timing of t17, which is the end timing of the game, the pressing order correct answer counter is set to "0" as shown in FIG. 63 (h). It will be cleared.

As described above, when the normal AT state is in a row, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the execution of the correct answer push order notification so as to prompt the correct answer in the push order when the normal replay combination is won. Even if the main MPU 72 does not directly know that the normal AT state has been set, the main MPU 72 will be in the normal AT state by generating the correct push order multiple times when the normal replay combination is won. It is possible to indirectly grasp the occurrence of the consecutive villas. This makes it possible for the main MPU 72 to temporarily turn off the AT1 signal and then turn it on again in accordance with the normal AT state.

In the sub-side MPU 82, if the normal replay combination is won in a situation that does not correspond to the normal AT state consecutive villas, the execution control of the incorrect answer push order notification is intentionally performed, so that the normal AT state is not the continuous villa situation. Despite this, the possibility that the correct push order will occur multiple times when the normal replay combination is won is reduced. As a result, the control of turning the AT1 signal into the OFF state and then turning it into the ON state can be easily executed at the time of the continuous villa in the normal AT state.

When the AT1 signal is once turned off and then turned on again during a continuous villa in the normal AT state, the OFF state is set before the measurement of the continuous villa wait time, and the setting to the ON state is set to the continuous villa wait time. It is done after the measurement of. By setting the consecutive villa wait time in this way, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. , It is possible to secure a period for recognizing that the AT1 signal is in the OFF state in the hall computer HC.

It should be noted that the value of the push order correct answer counter may be cleared to "0" when the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more and the AT1 signal is set to ON after the AT1 signal is set to OFF.

<Relationship between bonus AT state and output state of AT1 signal and AT2 signal>
Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process (FIG. 56) at the end, when a negative judgment is made in step S3109, a negative judgment is made in step S3110, a positive judgment is made in step S3111, or in step S3114. When the process is executed, the process proceeds to step S3115. In step S3115, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is being executed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74. When "1" is set in the bonus AT state flag, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3116.

When a negative determination is made in step S3115, or when the process of step S3116 is executed, it is determined in step S3117 whether or not "1" is set in the wait generation flag of the main RAM 74. , It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out of order in the CB internal rear state. When the wait generation flag is set to "1", the AT2 signal is set to the ON state and the wait generation flag is cleared to "0" in step S3118.

When a negative determination is made in step S3117, or when the process of step S3118 is executed, it is determined in step S3119 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". Then, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one set of bonus AT states is completed. If the value of the bonus AT counter is not "0", the external output setting process at the end of this operation is terminated as it is, and if the value of the bonus AT counter is "0", AT2 is performed in step S3120. After setting the signal to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of this operation is terminated.

Next, in the external output setting process (FIG. 60) at the start, the processing content executed in relation to the bonus AT state and the output states of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal will be described.

When a negative determination is made in step S3402, an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, or the process of step S3404 is executed, "1" is set in the bonus AT end flag of the main RAM 74 in step S3405. By determining whether or not it is set, it is determined whether or not one set in the bonus AT state is completed and the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3406.

When a negative determination is made in step S3405 or the process of step S3406 is executed, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. , Determines if a new set of bonus AT states is being started. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the external output setting process at the start of the main operation is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3408. The external output setting process at the start of this operation is terminated.

Next, the external output setting process before the start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. The external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S3701, it is determined whether or not it is in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state. If it is not in the CB internal post-state or CB in-progress state, that is, if it is in the CB non-internal state, the external output setting process before the start is terminated as it is.

In the case of the CB internal rear state or the CB in-progress state, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not "1" is set in the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74. The situation where "1" is set in the pre-start wait flag is the case where the first special replay combination is won in the CB internal post-state as described above. In addition to that, the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is elected as the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is used as the first stop under the condition that the AT1 signal is ON in the CB internal rear state. This is the case when it is operated. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the external output setting process before the start of the main operation is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state. After that, in step S3704, after clearing the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 to “0”, the external output setting process before the main start is terminated.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 65, the output modes of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state will be described.

FIG. 65 (a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 65 (b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 65 (c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 65 (d) shows the bonus. The execution period of the AT state is shown, FIG. 65 (e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 65 (f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 65 (g) shows. Indicates the setting status of the wait period.

As shown in FIG. 65 (e), the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t1, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, and the game is started at the timing of t2. finish. In this case, at the timing of t2, the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 65 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), other games are started at the timing of t3, which is the timing immediately after the start of the bonus AT state. ), The wait period (8 sec) is set. This wait period elapses at the timing of t4, and at the timing of t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of this set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and further, in FIG. 65 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t7, when the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

After that, at the timing of t8, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (f), but in this case, the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is 1 or more. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the bonus AT state is set again as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state again as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of this set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t10, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and further, in FIG. 65 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t11, when the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, since the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is "0", as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the timing of t12, which is the timing when a new game is started, is shown in FIG. 65 (c). As shown in the normal AT state, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65 (a).

Even when the bonus AT state is continuous as described above, when the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state each time the bonus AT state of one set ends and the bonus AT state of a new set is started. The AT2 signal is set to the ON state again. Further, even when the bonus AT state is continuous, a wait period occurs. By setting the wait period in this way, in a configuration in which the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game, the hole is set. It is possible to secure a period for recognizing that the AT2 signal is in the OFF state in the computer HC. Further, in this wait period, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the continuous villa in the bonus AT state on the image display device 66 or the like.

When the bonus AT state occurs, it shifts to the normal AT state after the end of the bonus AT state. In this case, when the bonus AT state ends and the normal AT state is entered, not only the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state but also the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. In this way, when the transition condition to the normal AT state is satisfied, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state without waiting for the occurrence of three bell winnings, so that the AT1 is started when the normal AT state is started. It is possible to set the signal to the ON state at an early stage.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 66, the output modes of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state will be described.

FIG. 66 (a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 66 (b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 66 (c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 66 (d) shows the bonus. The execution period of the AT state is shown, FIG. 66 (e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 66 (f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 66 (g) shows. Shows the setting status of the wait period, and FIG. 66 (h) shows the occurrence status of the bell winning.

As shown in FIG. 66 (e), at the timing of t1 in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state as shown in FIG. 66 (a) in the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 66 (c). , The game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t2 when the game ends, the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66 (c), while the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 66 (d). Further, at the timing of t2, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 66A.

Then, at the timing of t3, another game is started as shown in FIG. 66 (f). In this case, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the wait period (8 sec) is started as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Then, when the wait period elapses at the timing of t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), the final game of this set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 66 (g), the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66 (d), and further, in FIG. 66 (b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Further, at the timing of t6, the normal AT state is restarted as shown in FIG. 66 (c). However, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the AT1 signal is still maintained in the OFF state, and this OFF state is maintained even after the timing of t7, which is the timing when the wait period has elapsed as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Be maintained.

After that, in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 66 (h), a bell prize is generated at each of the timing of t8, the timing of t9, and the timing of t10, so that the timing of t10 is as shown in FIG. 66 (a). The AT1 signal is set to the ON state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The sub-side RAM 84 is provided with a privilege point counter, and the privilege points selected by winning the privilege points in the privilege point lottery process are added to the privilege point counter. Then, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference value, the normal AT state is in a row. In addition, when the transition condition to the bonus AT state is satisfied, the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state is added, and even if the additional lottery process is performed in the additional state, the remaining execution in the normal AT state is executed. The number of times is added. In this case, if the conditions for transitioning to the bonus AT state are satisfied, or if the additional winning is achieved by the additional lottery process, the remaining number of executions itself is not memorized, but the privilege reference value is stored in the above privilege point counter. The configuration is such that information corresponding to × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. Therefore, it is possible to commonly use the privilege point counter in the configuration in which the mode of the continuous villa in the normal AT state is diversified as described above. As a result, it is possible to aggregate the storage areas to be referred to when determining whether or not the normal AT state should be consecutively villaged, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. Further, in a configuration in which data is handled in 1-byte units, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity as compared with a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for the remaining number of executions are provided in byte units.

When the privilege lottery trigger is won, one privilege point is selected from multiple types of privilege points by the privilege point lottery process. Therefore, the privilege point is awarded when the privilege lottery trigger is won. It is possible to diversify the mode when addition is performed. In addition, since the privilege points selected in this case are all smaller than the privilege standard value, the accumulation of privilege points will result in the occurrence of consecutive villas in the normal AT state, and the normal AT state will be continuous. It is possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation for the villa.

When the normal AT state is continued, the privilege points for the privilege standard value are subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is commonly used, it is possible to standardize the handling of privilege points when generating a continuous villa in a normal AT state, and the processing load can be reduced.

In a situation where the privilege points are larger than the privilege standard value × (n-1) and smaller than the privilege standard value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more), the privilege standard value × (n-1) is exceeded. Information corresponding to the numerical value of the minute is notified by the privilege point notification unit 67. As a result, the player can play the game while clearly recognizing how many privilege points are required to generate the villa in the normal AT state, and the player's expectation is suitable. It becomes possible to increase to. In this case, the privilege point notification unit 67 notifies the remaining value when the privilege points are divided by the privilege reference numerical value. As a result, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is commonly used, the numerical value of the privilege point notified by the privilege point notification unit 67 can be derived by a simple processing configuration.

In a situation where the privilege points are a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard value × n and smaller than the privilege standard value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more), the stock notification unit 68 provides information corresponding to the n. Be notified. As a result, the player can recognize the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state, and the superiority complex of the player can be suitably enhanced. In this case, the stock notification unit 68 notifies the value of the quotient when the privilege points are divided by the privilege reference value. As a result, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is commonly used, the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state notified by the stock notification unit 68 can be derived by a simple processing configuration.

In the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state, when the privilege points become equal to or more than the privilege reference value, the additional state is entered. Then, in the added state, a situation may occur in which the value of the privilege reference value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter. This makes it possible to closely relate each of these states.

If the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege standard value when the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state ends, in the configuration where the normal AT state is consecutive, in the situation where the privilege points are less than the privilege standard value, other If the normal AT state is continuous due to the continuation condition, the privilege points less than the privilege standard value are retained even in the normal AT state of the consecutive villa destination. As a result, there are many opportunities for the privilege points to exceed the privilege standard value, and it is possible to generate many opportunities for having a sense of expectation as to whether or not the privilege points can exceed the privilege standard value. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the benefit even if the privilege points are acquired in the pre-branch AT state or just before the end of the branch AT state. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to satisfy the condition for acquiring the privilege points at any timing of the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state. Furthermore, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the profit when the normal AT state stays in a row, and it is possible to raise the expectation that the normal AT state stays in a row.

Not only does the normal AT state stay in a row when the AT continuation is won in the AT continuation lottery process, but also the normal AT state stays in a row when the privilege points exceed the privilege standard value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the normal AT state stays in a row, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the normal AT state to stay in a row.

When the normal AT state is continuous, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect in the branch AT state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the winning effect or the drawing effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the number of executions of the winning effect becomes the predetermined number of executions (12 times), the probability of winning the AT continuation at that time becomes the highest probability regardless of the probability of winning the AT continuation. This makes it possible to raise the player's expectation that the winning effect will be executed.

In addition, since the winning effect is executed even when the AT state is normally in a row because the remaining number of executions is one or more, the more the number of remaining executions is set, the more the number of times the winning effect is executed is determined. Expectations for the number of executions are increased. Therefore, when a large number of remaining executions is set, not only the benefit that the number of consecutive villas in the normal AT state increases, but also the benefit that the probability of winning the AT continuation increases increases. Therefore, the advantage of setting a large number of times as the remaining number of executions is enhanced.

The number of times the victory effect is executed is notified by the victory number notification unit 69. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect will be the predetermined number of executions.

Since the stock notification unit 68 notifies the remaining number of executions of the normal AT state, it is possible for the player to recognize at least how long the normal AT state is in a row through the stock notification unit 68. It is possible to enhance the sense of superiority. Further, the player himself / herself can recognize the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect will be the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions grasped by the stock notification unit 68. This makes it possible to closely relate the normal AT state consecutive villas related to the number of remaining executions and the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process, and the effect of setting both consecutive villa modes. Can be made synergistic.

When the remaining number of executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the digestion of the remaining number of executions is prioritized, and the AT continuation lottery process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal AT state from staying in a row more than necessary, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the AT continuation lottery process results in continuous failure.

Normally, when the AT state is consecutive, the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process may increase. As a result, when the normal AT state is a continuous villa, the continuous villa is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the normal AT state being a continuous villa is enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player when the normal AT state is in a row, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning, the promotion lottery process for the AT continuation probability is executed, and the promotion winning occurs, so that the probability of the AT continuation winning increases. As a result, the player's attention to whether or not the AT continuation lottery process will result in the AT continuation winning is increased. Further, by executing the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability in this way, it is possible to set the probability of the promotion winning in the promotion lottery process independently of the probability of the AT continuation winning. This increases the degree of freedom in setting the probability.

In the branch AT state, a battle effect corresponding to whether or not a normal AT state is generated is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the normal AT state is a continuous villa. It will be possible and the interest of the game will be improved. In this case, if the winning effect is executed as the battle effect, it is highly possible that the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process is high. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a winning effect will occur, and the interest of the game will be improved.

By winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect, and when the victory effect is executed as this battle effect, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is executed and the promotion is performed. By winning the promotion in the lottery process, the probability of winning the AT continuation increases. In this case, when a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect, the consecutive villas in the AT state are normally determined, so the player should play the game while expecting the victory effect or the draw effect to be executed. It becomes. In addition, if the winning effect is executed among the winning effect and the draw effect, there is a possibility that the probability of winning the AT continuation is high, so the player expects that the winning effect will be further executed. The game will be played. As a result, the player's expectation can be made multi-stage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

If the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more and the normal AT state continues, the promotion lottery process for the AT continuation probability is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the probability of winning the promotion from being set to be high in the promotion lottery process from becoming unnecessarily large.

Even if the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation failure, if the privilege points exceed the privilege standard value in the situation where the defeat effect is being executed in the subsequent branch AT state, the normal AT state will continue. .. As a result, even if the privilege points cannot exceed the privilege standard value by the end of the pre-branch AT state, the normal AT state of consecutive villas is more likely to occur when the privilege points are larger. , The degree of attention to the acquisition of privilege points will be increased.

Even if the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation loss, the AT continuation lottery process is executed again after the consecutive villas in a configuration in which the normal AT state is consecutively villas due to the other continuation conditions being satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the villa in the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to suitably maintain the expectation of the player in the normal AT state.

If the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation lottery being out of order and the AT continuation lottery process is executed due to the normal AT state being continuous due to the other continuation conditions being satisfied, the AT continuation lottery process on the subsequent side Can be highly likely to win the AT continuation. As a result, even if an event in which the AT continuation is not continued occurs in the AT continuation lottery process, it is possible to increase the probability that the normal AT state will continue to stay, and the interest of the game will be improved.

The probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process increases as the AT continuation lottery process results in the continuous winning, and the number of times the winning effect is executed is determined even if the AT continuation lottery process does not result in the continuous winning. It increases as the number of executions (12 times) increases. As a result, there is a high probability that the AT continuation winning will be achieved in both the case where the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning and the normal AT state continues, and the case where the AT continuation is lost and the normal AT state continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that the AT state will be in a row, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Even if the privilege points are not equal to or higher than the privilege standard value and the AT continuation is not continued in the AT continuation lottery process, the revival winning will be achieved in the revival lottery process in the final chance state, so that the normal AT state will be in a row. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the normal AT state is consecutively villaged, and it is possible to provide many opportunities for the normal AT state to be consecutively villaged. In this case, the probability of winning the resurrection in the resurrection lottery process differs depending on the privilege points. As a result, even if the privilege points are less than the privilege standard value, the probability that the privilege points will be revived in the revival lottery process will be affected, and it will be possible to increase the degree of attention to the privilege points. In particular, the larger the value of the privilege points, the higher the probability of winning the revival, so even in a situation where the privilege points cannot exceed the privilege standard value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the acquisition of the privilege points.

Regardless of whether the normal AT state is consecutively villaged due to the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process, or the normal AT state is consecutively villaged when the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege standard value. While the remaining privilege points are taken over to the normal AT state of the villa destination, if the revival is won in the revival lottery process, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to limit the profits of acquiring privilege points to some extent. In addition, depending on the type of event that triggered the consecutive villa in the normal AT state, there are cases where the privilege points are inherited and cases where the privilege points are not inherited, and the transfer mode of the privilege points will be diversified. .. Therefore, the mode of progress of the game will be diversified in relation to the privilege points, and the interest of the game will be improved.

The probability of winning a resurrection in the resurrection lottery process varies depending not only on the privilege points but also on the winning combination in the game. As a result, points to be noted when executing the revival lottery process will be diversified, and the interest of the game will be improved.

If the extension trigger is won in the final chance state, the final chance state is extended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player when the revival lottery process does not result in the revival winning even though the extension trigger is won.

A transition to the normal AT state may occur based on the fact that the normal replay combination is won in the transition chance state. As a result, the game is played while expecting to win the normal replay role in the transition chance state, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, if the winning combination is won in the transition chance state, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state is high. As a result, in the transition chance state, it is expected that not only the normal replay role but also the expectation improvement role will be won, and the roles expected to be won will be diversified. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

If you win the role of improving expectations, the transition chance state will be extended. As a result, when the winning combination is won, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state is high. In addition, by winning the role of improving the expectation and further winning the transition probability UP in the transition probability UP lottery process, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process increases. As a result, when the winning combination is won, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state is high.

The probability of winning the normal replay role is higher than the probability of winning the expectation improvement role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning the normal replay combination in the transition chance state, and it is possible to give many opportunities to expect the transition to the normal AT state. In addition, if a role with a low winning probability is won, a situation that is advantageous to the player can generally occur, but if a winning role with a lower probability of winning is won than a normal replay role. Since the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when he / she wins the expectation improving role.

The normal replay combination serves as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but does not serve as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the normal replay role in the transition chance state. Further, the expectation level improving role does not serve as a trigger for shifting to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but serves as a trigger for shifting to the normal AT state in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the expectation-improving role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the expectation-improving role.

If the 1st to 3rd special replay combinations are won or the result is lost in the lottery process, the start wait time is set at the end of the game, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next game starts. Wait. Then, when the start wait time is set, the bonus AT state is started. In this case, it is possible to emphasize that the bonus AT state is started by setting the start wait time. As a result, the player feels that the start wait time has been set, and the feeling of excitement for the start of the bonus AT state is enhanced. On the other hand, in the bonus AT state, the player is more conscious of digesting the game, and if the start wait time is set in the middle of the game, the player may think that it is troublesome. On the other hand, in such a situation, the start wait time is not set, so that it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring.

Further, even if the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, the bonus AT state is not entered if the occurrence of the penalty event is dealt with. If the start wait time is set in such a situation, the player may be uncomfortable. However, in such a situation, the start wait time is not set, so that such an inconvenience should not occur. Is possible.

If the first special replay combination is won or the result is lost in the lottery process, the freeze time is set at the start of the game. Then, when these lottery results are obtained, the start of the bonus AT state or the increase in the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is surely generated. As a result, the player can feel unexpected about the set freeze time and feel uplifted, and can stop the game while recognizing that it is the result of the lottery. It becomes. Further, since such a freeze time function can occur regardless of whether or not it is in the bonus AT state, it is possible to preferably generate the function by setting the freeze time even in the bonus AT state. It will be possible.

The main MPU 72 dares to select the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be stopped when the normal replay winning combination is won, in which the normal replay winning occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The side MPU 82 executes control for notifying the selected stop order when the normal AT state is in a row. Then, the main MPU 72 sets the output of the external output of the AT1 signal corresponding to the continuous villa in the normal AT state based on the fact that the selected stop order and the actual stop order match. As a result, even if the sub-side MPU 82 is configured to independently manage the progress of the normal AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not need to transmit information to the main-side MPU 72, and the villa in the normal AT state can be supported. The external output setting can be made on the main MPU 72.

When the main MPU 72 wins the normal replay combination, the main MPU 72 always executes the push order lottery process for selecting the stop order. As a result, it is not necessary to switch between the situation where the push order lottery process is executed and the situation where the push order lottery process is not executed, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

The normal replay combination is the combination with the highest winning probability in the normal AT state. Then, by using this normal replay combination to grasp the consecutive villas in the normal AT state, when the consecutive villas in the normal AT state occur, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to grasp the consecutive villas at an early stage. ..

The main MPU 72 corresponds to the normal AT state of the villa for the external output of the AT1 signal when an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order occur multiple times when the normal replay combination is won. Set the output settings. As a result, the possibility that the output setting is performed when the above-mentioned matching event occurs by chance is reduced. In particular, the main MPU 72 sets the output setting when the above-mentioned matching event occurs a plurality of times without the event that the selected stop order and the actual stop order do not match when the normal replay combination is won. Therefore, the possibility that the output setting is performed when the matching event occurs by chance is greatly reduced.

The normal replay combination is a combination in which a prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. .. As a result, the profit of the player does not change depending on whether or not the stop order is notified, so that restrictions on notifying the stop order are unlikely to occur.

The stop order selected when the normal replay combination is won does not include the stop order for first stopping the left reel 32L. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first. Therefore, when the stop order is selected as described above, the normal replay combination is won. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order match will occur by chance.

The sub-side MPU 82 can notify the stop order different from the stop order selected by the main-side MPU 72 when the normal replay combination is won in the situation where the continuous villa in the normal AT state does not occur. This makes it possible to positively prevent the accidental occurrence of an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order match when the normal replay combination is won, and the content to be grasped by the main MPU 72. It is possible to improve the accuracy.

When the event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order match occurs multiple times when the normal replay combination is won, the main MPU 72 changes the external output of the AT1 signal to the normal AT state. In the configuration in which the corresponding output setting is performed, the sub-side MPU 82 notifies the stop order different from the selected stop order when the above-mentioned matching event occurs once. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the stop order notification is executed.

In each of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the execution control of the push order notification for generating the bell winning is performed by the sub-side MPU 82, so that the processing load of the main-side MPU 72 can be reduced. In this case, the determination of the end trigger of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state is not entirely made by the sub-side MPU 82, but the determination of the end trigger of the bonus AT state is made by the main MPU 72. As a result, it is possible to set the end wait time in the main MPU 72 to enhance the effect of the bonus AT state among the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, and reduce the processing load of the main MPU 72. However, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In the bonus AT state, only the transition triggered by the lottery processing result of the winning combination occurs, whereas in the normal AT state, not only the transition triggered by the lottery processing result of the winning combination in the transition chance state, but also the ceiling game There will also be a transition triggered by digestion. As a result, while reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72 by limiting the transition pattern for the bonus AT state in which the transition control is performed by the main MPU 72, a plurality of types of transition patterns for the normal AT state are set. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

More patterns of establishment of continuation conditions are set in the normal AT state than in the bonus AT state. As a result, for the bonus AT state in which the continuation control is performed by the main MPU 72, the pattern for establishing the continuation condition in the normal AT state can be reduced while reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72 by limiting the pattern for establishing the continuation condition. By setting multiple types, it is possible to diversify the game.

In a configuration in which a bell prize is generated when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the first bell combination or the first bell combination or the first bell combination is generated. The AT1 signal is set to the ON state based on the fact that the main MPU 72 specifies that the bell winning has occurred when the 2 bell combination is won. As a result, even if the sub-side MPU 82 is configured to independently manage the progress of the normal AT state, the output setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state is performed without requiring the transmission of information from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main-side MPU 72. Can be done.

The main MPU 72 sets the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times. As a result, the possibility that the output is set to the ON state when the bell prize is accidentally generated is reduced. In particular, the main MPU 72 sets the above output when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times without the event that the bell winning does not occur even though the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won. The possibility that the output setting will be made when a bell prize is accidentally generated is greatly reduced.

The stop order that enables the bell to win when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won does not include the stop order in which the left reel 32L is stopped first. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, so that the bell prize may be accidentally generated by selecting the stop order as described above. It is possible to reduce it.

When the bell winning is not generated even though the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, the main MPU 72 may monitor whether or not a bell winning has occurred in both the case where the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the case where the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load can be reduced.

The number of times the bell prize is generated, which triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, is larger than the number of times the push order is out of order when the bell combination is won, which triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to accurately set the AT1 signal to the ON state while enabling the AT1 signal to be set to the OFF state at an early stage when the normal AT state ends.

There are two types of winning combinations to be monitored when setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the OFF state: the first bell combination and the second bell combination. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities to set each output while increasing the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each winning combination.

When the winning state of the CB combination is maintained, the transition to the normal AT state occurs. This makes it possible to limit the period during which the transition to the normal AT state is possible in relation to the winning combination, and it should be noted that the player wins the CB combination and maintains the winning state of the CB combination. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

The medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase in the CB state. In this case, when the winning state of the CB role is obtained, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous CB middle state when the winning is generated, but to shift to the normal AT state by not generating the winning. There is sex. As a result, it is possible to greatly differ the profits of the player depending on whether or not the CB prize is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the CB role.

In the CB state, the medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase, but do not decrease. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player who unintentionally generates the CB prize.

An internal state notification unit 63 that lights up when the CB combination is won is provided. As a result, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a prize when the CB role is won.

In a configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the normal AT state is reached and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the bonus AT state is reached, the CB combination When is won, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the AT1 signal ON state and the AT2 signal ON state are set. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the CB combination has been won before notifying the outside of the slot machine 10.

When the CB combination is won, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the CB combination has been won before the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are started in the game, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the CB winning.

If the conditions for transition to the bonus AT state are satisfied, or if a CB prize occurs in the bonus AT state, the game content in the CB state is prioritized, and the game executed in the CB state continues in the bonus AT state. It is treated as the digestion of the number of games. As a result, the player will play the game so that the CB prize does not occur when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied or in the bonus AT state. Therefore, the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are carefully performed, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the bonus AT state is simply invalidated, the bonus AT state and the CB in-progress state can be related to each other, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Even if the CB middle state ends, it does not immediately return to the bonus AT state, but returns to the bonus AT state by becoming the winning state of the CB role. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she wins the CB role after the end of the CB state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the amount of games required to reach the winning state of the CB role is treated as the amount of the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state. As a result, after the end of the CB state, the game is played while expecting to win the CB role by the time the game for the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state is completed, and the interest of the game is improved. ..

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the AT1 signal when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the bonus AT state is entered is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal executed by the main MPU 72. The setting process is executed in the normal process (FIG. 11) instead of the external output setting process (step S216) at the end.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the output state of the AT1 signal is the ON state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, "1" is set in the midway transition flag provided in the main RAM 74 in step S3803. The midway transition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the bonus AT state has been entered in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state. After that, in step S3804, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. When a negative determination is made in step S3802 or the process of step S3804 is executed, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3805.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3806 whether or not the bonus AT state has ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, the AT2 signal output state is set to the OFF state in step S3807. In the following step S3808, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the midway transition flag of the main RAM 74. If "1" is set, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3809.

When the process of step S3805 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3806, when a negative determination is made in step S3808, or when the process of step S3809 is executed, other processes are performed in step S3810. Execute. In other processes, the processes of steps S3101 to S3114 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the first embodiment are executed. After that, this setting process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the bonus AT state is entered, the AT1 signal set to the OFF state at the time of the transition of the bonus AT state is at the end of the bonus AT state. It is set to the ON state again. If the bonus AT state is entered in the middle of the normal AT state, the remaining continuous game in the normal AT state at that time is retained, and when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state is restarted from the remaining continuous game state. To. In this case, if the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state is applied on the condition that the bell winning occurs multiple times as in the case of shifting from the non-AT state to the normal AT state, the bell winning occurs multiple times. There is a possibility that the remaining continuous game will be exhausted and the normal AT state will end without the AT1 signal being set to the ON state. On the other hand, under the situation where the bonus AT state ends and returns to the normal AT state as described above, by setting the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT after returning is set. It is possible to set the AT1 signal to the ON state by the end of the state.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the mode of the final chance state is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a final chance state setting process executed by the sub-side MPU 82. The setting process is executed when the state shifts to the final chance state.

First, in step S3901, the value of the privilege point counter is grasped. In the following step S3902, the value of the grasped privilege point counter is set in the continuous game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The continuous game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the final chance state in the sub-side MPU 82.

After that, in step S3903, the revival lottery table corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter grasped in step S3901 is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of winning the resurrection in the resurrection lottery process. After that, the setting process of the final chance state is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the probability of winning the resurrection in the resurrection lottery process increases according to the value of the privilege point counter, but also the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter is set. As a result, the importance of the value of the privilege point counter is increased, and the expectation for winning the privilege lottery trigger during the normal AT state is increased.

Instead of setting the value of the privilege point counter as it is in the continuous game counter, the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter may be set in the continuous game counter. For example, a plurality of stages may be set according to the value range of the privilege point counter, and the number of continuous games corresponding to the stages may be set in the continuous game counter. Further, as a configuration in which the number of continuous games for doubling the value of the privilege point counter, the number of continuous games for doubling the value of the privilege point counter, or the number of continuous games for a predetermined integer multiple of 4 times or more is set. May be good.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content when the normal AT state ends is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the termination process of the normal AT state executed by the sub-side MPU 82. The termination process is executed when the final chance state ends without winning the revival.

First, in step S4001, a lottery process for holding privilege points is executed. In the holding lottery process, the holding lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out in the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is used. The above-mentioned holding lottery table is collated. The holding lottery table is set so that, for example, the holding lottery table has a probability of 1/2.

In the following step S4002, it is determined whether or not the result of the holding lottery process in step S4001 is holding winning. If the winning is not held, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0" in step S4003, and then the termination process of the normal AT state is terminated. If the winning is held, the value of the privilege point counter is maintained as it is. The termination process of the normal AT state is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the normal AT state ends in the situation where the number of remaining sets is "0", the value of the privilege point counter may be inherited to the next normal AT state. As a result, when the normal AT state ends with the value of the privilege point counter remaining to some extent, the expectation of the consecutive villa is high for the next normal AT state. In this case, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to continue the game.

In addition, the probability of winning the holding lottery in the holding lottery process may be changed according to the value of the privilege point counter. For example, the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of winning the holding.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502), a value less than the privilege standard value is selected when the privilege point is won, but a value equal to or more than the privilege standard value can be selected. May be. In this case, the sub-side MPU 82 can specify that the configuration for shifting to the additional state or the transition condition for the additional state is satisfied at the timing when the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value is selected in the privilege point lottery process. By setting the data, both the privilege points when winning in the privilege point lottery process and the privilege points when winning in the additional lottery process (step S2808) are added to the privilege point counter. In this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the conditions for transition to the additional state.

(2) A counter for the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the value of the remaining number of sets counter is added by 1 and from the privilege point counter. It may be configured to subtract the privilege standard numerical value. In addition, when the additional lottery process (step S2808) results in an additional winning, the remaining set number of additions is added to the remaining set number counter without adding the privilege points to the privilege point counter. May be good. In this case, the sub-side MPU 82 can grasp the remaining number of sets separately from the privilege points. For example, when controlling the light emission of the privilege point notification unit 67, the privilege point counter is referred to and the stock notification unit 68 emits light. When performing control, it is possible to have a processing configuration in which the remaining set count counter is referred to.

(3) The privilege standard numerical value is not limited to "7" and is arbitrary. However, the minimum selected in the privilege point lottery process so that if the event that wins the privilege point occurs multiple times in the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502), the event that exceeds the privilege standard value occurs. It is preferable that the value is at least twice the privilege points of.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) is executed when the privilege lottery trigger is won, the privilege point lottery process is performed when the privilege lottery trigger is won and a prize is generated. (Step S2002, Step S2502) may be executed. In this case, as the privilege lottery trigger, a winning combination is not generated according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. May be included, or may not be included.

(5) The privilege point counter may have a data capacity larger than 1 byte. Even in this case, in a configuration in which each counter is handled in byte units, the required storage capacity can be reduced by using the privilege point counter in common. For example, when the privilege points and the remaining set count of the normal AT are managed by separate counters, and the privilege point counter has a 2-byte configuration and the remaining set count counter has a 1-byte configuration, 3 bytes are required. However, it is possible to reduce by 1 byte by sharing it as a privilege point counter having a 2-byte configuration.

(6) Instead of the configuration in which the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) is executed when the privilege lottery trigger is won, the privilege point lottery process is executed when the privilege lottery trigger is won. The privilege points corresponding to the winning privilege lottery trigger may be added to the privilege point counter. In this case, since the privilege point lottery process is not executed, the processing load is reduced, and the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger and the privilege points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game. Is enhanced.

(7) If the privilege lottery trigger is won, a lottery will be held to decide whether or not to add the privilege points, and if the lottery is won, the privilege points corresponding to the privilege lottery trigger will be the privilege points. It may be configured to be added to the counter. In this case, the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger and the privilege points is clarified, and the degree of attention to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game is increased.

(8) Instead of the configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter commonly used is set separately for the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68, the value of the privilege point counter is directly set in the predetermined notification unit. It may be configured to be notified. In this case, by enabling the player to recognize the privilege points corresponding to the occurrence of one remaining set number, the remaining set number can be recognized from the value of the privilege point counter, and the remaining set number can be recognized. It is possible to recognize the privilege points required for the number of times to be newly added once.

(9) When the normal AT state continues without going through the final chance state, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege standard value, it is replaced with a configuration that is surely inherited to the normal AT state of the consecutive villa destination. Therefore, it may be configured to be taken over when the takeover condition is satisfied. For example, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference value, it may be inherited when the transfer is won in the transfer lottery process executed at the time of the consecutive villa in the normal AT state. Further, for example, when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or more than the transfer reference value, the configuration may be such that the value is inherited even if it is less than the privilege reference value.

(10) Even if the return to the normal AT state occurs in the final chance state, the privilege points less than the privilege standard value may be inherited to the normal AT state of the consecutive villa destination. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the privilege points will be equal to or higher than the privilege standard value.

(11) The value of the privilege point counter when the normal AT state ends may be configured to always be inherited by the normal AT state in which the transition condition is newly satisfied and the transition is made. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the privilege points will be equal to or higher than the privilege standard value.

(12) During the period when the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) results in AT continuation failure and the defeat production is being executed as a battle production, the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or higher than the privilege standard value, and the villa is in a normal AT state. If, or if a revival is won in the final chance state and a continuous villa in the normal AT state occurs, the promotion lottery process at the time of revival is executed for the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process. If the promotion is won in the promotion lottery process, the probability of winning the AT continuation may be high. In this case, the probability of winning the promotion may be higher than the probability of winning the promotion in the promotion lottery process (step S2316) of the AT continuation probability that occurs when the AT continuation winning is performed and the winning effect is executed. Good. In addition, the probability of winning the AT continuation may be higher when the player wins the revival in the final chance state. In these cases, the player's expectation is that the normal AT state of the consecutive villas is more likely to occur when the normal AT state of the consecutive villas is satisfied under the conditions set as the rear order. Can be kept high until the end of the normal AT state.

(13) The process of setting the AT continuation probability to the highest probability in relation to the victory counter so that the normal AT state becomes easier to stay in the normal AT state (step S2308) and the AT continuation probability. In addition to or in place of the configuration for executing the promotion lottery process (step S2316), a configuration for easily acquiring privilege points, a configuration for increasing the value of the acquired privilege points, a configuration for easily acquiring large privilege points, and a balance. By adopting at least one configuration that increases the probability that the number of sets will be added and the configuration that makes it easier to select the remaining number of sets for a large number of times, the normal AT state will be in a row in relation to the privilege points. The configuration may be easy.

(14) If the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) results in AT continuation loss, but the normal AT state continues, the probability of winning the AT continuation lottery process after that is low. It may be configured to be or can be low. In this case, it is possible to suppress the probability that the normal AT state will stay in a row while ensuring the opportunity for the normal AT state to stay in a row.

(15) The type of probability of winning AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is not limited to 6 types, and is arbitrary, even if it is 2, 3, 4, or 5 types. Often, there may be seven or more types. However, in order to create an opportunity to be set to the highest probability regardless of the probability of winning the AT continuation, it is preferable that there are three or more kinds of probabilities of winning the AT continuation.

(16) Instead of the configuration in which the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) becomes the highest probability when the number of executions of the victory effect reaches the predetermined number of executions, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability A configuration may be configured in which the probability is higher than when the promotion is won in (step S2316). For example, in a configuration in which the probability of winning the AT continuation is increased by one step when the promotion is won in the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability (step S2316), the number of executions of the winning effect becomes the predetermined number of executions. It is conceivable that the probability of winning the AT continuation will be two levels or higher.

(17) The number of executions of the winning effect required to set a high probability of winning the AT continuation is not limited to 12 times, but may be 1 time or 2 times. It may be 3 times, 4 times, 13 times or more. However, in order to increase the degree of attention to the number of times the winning effect is executed, it is preferable that the number is twice or more.

(18) Instead of the configuration in which the number of executions of the victory effect is not inherited to the normal AT state that is transferred when the next transition condition is satisfied, the configuration may be such that the victory effect is surely inherited or may be inherited. The configuration that can be taken over may be a configuration in which a takeover lottery process that wins the takeover is executed with a predetermined probability, and is taken over when the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege standard value but is greater than or equal to the transfer standard value. May be.

(19) In order for the promotion lottery process (step S2316) of the AT continuation probability to be executed, the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) results in the AT continuation winning, and the battle lottery process (step S2311) produces a winning effect. It was necessary to be selected, but instead of this, if the AT continuation winning is achieved, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed, and whether or not the AT continuation winning is achieved may be obtained. Regardless of the fact that the winning effect is executed, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed. Further, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed when the normal AT state is consecutive.

(20) The victory effect in the battle effect may be a victory that can be selected only when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference value, and the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is used to continuously win the AT. The configuration may be selected only when becomes. In this case, in order to set a high probability of winning the AT continuation in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect, it is necessary to generate many target conditions among the above conditions, and the probability of winning the AT continuation is required. Can be suppressed from being set high.

(21) The probability that the winning effect is selected in the battle lottery process (step S2303, step S2311, step S2605) may vary. For example, the probability that the winning effect is selected may be higher or lower as the number of times the winning effect is executed increases. In this case, depending on the number of times the winning effect is executed, the winning effect may be easily selected or the winning effect may be difficult to be selected. In addition, the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability that the winning effect will be selected, or the lower the value. In this case, the privilege points and the winning effect can be closely related. Further, the probability that the winning effect is selected may be higher or lower as the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is larger. In this case, the number of remaining sets and the winning effect can be closely related.

(22) When the number of times the normal AT state has been consecutively held becomes the predetermined number of executions (for example, 20 times) because the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is performed. Therefore, the probability of winning the AT continuation may be high (for example, the highest probability). In this case, the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state and the probability of winning the AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process are more closely related.

(23) Probability of winning AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) according to the number of times the winning effect is executed or the number of times the remaining set number is 1 or more and the normal AT state is consecutively villaged. May be configured to increase gradually. For example, when the above number of times becomes the first reference number (for example, 3 times), the probability of winning AT continuation increases by one step, and when the above number of times becomes the second reference number (for example, 5 times), AT continues. The probability of winning may be different in relation to the reference number of times, such that the probability of winning is further increased by two steps.

(24) The stock notification unit 68 is configured to perform notification according to the range of the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state, but instead of this, notification corresponding to the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state on a one-to-one basis. May be configured, or the remaining number of sets may be notified as it is.

(25) Even if the number of remaining sets is 1 or more, or even if the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning, once one execution of the normal AT state is completed, the non-AT state is temporarily entered. After the transition, a new execution time in the normal AT state may occur again.

(26) The privilege points may not be referred to when the revival lottery process is executed in the final chance state. In this case, in the resurrection lottery process, the lottery is performed according to the lottery process result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game. In the configuration, when the revival is won in the final chance state, the privilege points may not be inherited to the normal AT state of the consecutive villa destination as in the above embodiment, or may be inherited.

(27) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the privilege points less than the privilege standard value are referred to in the final chance state revival lottery process (step S2907), the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) is less than the privilege standard value. The privilege points may be referred to, and the larger the privilege points, the higher the probability of winning the AT continuation. In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation winning, the privilege point counter may be configured to clear "0", and if the "0" is cleared, it will be handed over to the normal AT state of the consecutive villa destination. It may be configured as such.

(28) Instead of the configuration in which the probability of winning a resurrection in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) changes according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game in the final chance state, the resurrection win is won according to the winning result. It may be configured such that the probability of becoming is fluctuating. In this case, as a role of changing the probability of winning the revival, a prize is won according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It may be a configuration in which a combination in which is not generated is included, or a configuration in which the combination is not included.

(29) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the number of times a predetermined role such as the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role is won or won in the final chance state is set. The probability of winning the revival may change accordingly in the revival lottery process (step S2907). For example, if the predetermined role is won once or twice, the first winning probability is set, and if the predetermined role is won three or four times, the second winning probability is higher than the first winning probability. Can be considered. In this case, the player pays attention to the number of times a predetermined role is won in the final chance state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(30) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and points are added according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) or the winning result in the final chance state. , The normal AT state may be continued according to the accumulated points. In this case, the privilege points may be added even in the final chance state, and the normal AT state may be continued when the privilege points exceed the privilege reference value in the final chance state.

(31) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the normal AT state is changed according to the number of times a predetermined combination is won or the number of times a predetermined combination is won in the final chance state. It may be configured to be used. In this case, the probability that the normal AT state stays in a row increases as the number of times the monitoring event is executed increases among the number of times the predetermined combination is won and the number of times the predetermined combination is won, and the number of times the monitoring event is executed is 0. In the case of the number of times or the maximum number of times, the normal AT state may be a continuous villa. In addition, as the predetermined combination, in order for the player to be able to clearly recognize whether or not a monitoring event has occurred, it is preferable that the combination does not cause a so-called omission, and for example, a normal replay combination can be mentioned. ..

(32) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won, but the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when another combination is won. It may be configured as such. For example, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed when the first bell combination or the second bell combination, which is a combination that does not generate a prize depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is won. Transition lottery process (step S1609) when the first watermelon combination or the second watermelon combination, which is a combination that does not generate a prize depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is won. ) May be executed. Further, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed regardless of which combination is won, and in this case, the probability of winning the transition varies depending on the winning combination. Good.

(33) In the transition chance state, instead of the configuration in which the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay winning occurs. It may be configured as such.

(34) In the transition chance state, when the expectation improvement role is won, the transition probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is executed and the transition probability UP is won, so that the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S1609). Although the configuration is such that the probability is high, the probability is not limited to this, and when the expectation improvement role is won, the probability of winning the transition is set high in the transition lottery process (step S1609). The configuration may be such that it is surely generated.

(35) In the transition chance state, if the expectation improvement role is won, the number of continuous games in the transition chance state is surely extended. If the lottery process is executed and the game is won, the number of continuous games may be extended. Further, a plurality of types of continuous games are set, and the number of continuous games to be extended may be selected from among them.

(36) When the expected degree improving combination is won in the transition chance state, the process of adding the privilege points to the privilege point counter may be executed. In this case, the privilege points may be inherited to the normal AT state on the condition that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state, and the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, the privilege points may be carried over to the next normal AT state.

(37) In the above embodiment, although the penalty event occurs and the player is not in the non-AT state, the bell prize is generated three times and the AT1 signal is turned ON, and in that situation, the second special replay combination or the second special replay combination or the second. 3 When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped in the game in which the special replay combination is won, the start wait time is set in that game. In this case, instead of the configuration in which the image indicating that the bonus AT state is started at the start wait time is displayed on the image display device 66, the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state in the penalty situation is satisfied. The image display device 66 may display an image that allows the player to recognize that the player is subject to a penalty and no profit is given. Further, a warning image for the penalty operation may be displayed.

(38) In the bonus AT state, if the first to third special replay combinations are won or the result is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 12), the start wait time is not set instead of the bonus AT state. In this situation, a shorter start wait time may be set than when the first to third special replay combinations are won or the result is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 12).

(39) In the bonus AT state, if the first special replay combination is won or the result is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 12), not only the start wait time is not set, but also the freeze time is not set. May be. This makes it possible to increase the digestion speed of the game during the bonus AT state.

(40) In the bonus AT state, instead of the configuration in which the remaining number of sets in the bonus AT state is added when the first to third special replay roles are won or the result is lost, the bonus AT state The number of continuous games may be extended.

(41) In the additional state, the push order selected by the main MPU 72 at the time of winning the replay is not normally notified, but instead of this, the push order may be notified even in the additional state. As a result, even when the normal AT state shifts to the additional state in the pre-branch AT state immediately after the continuous villa, there is an opportunity to set the AT1 signal to OFF and ON.

(42) The combination in which the push order is selected by the main MPU 72 in order to set the AT1 signal to OFF and ON when the normal AT state is continuous is not limited to the normal replay combination and is not limited to other combinations. It may be a role. In addition, a configuration may be configured in which a plurality of roles including a normal replay role are targeted. However, the combination to be selected in the push order needs to be a combination different from the combination in which the frequency of occurrence of winning is improved by notifying the stop order in the normal AT state and the bonus AT state. Further, the winning combination for which the pushing order is selected is preferably a winning combination regardless of the pushing order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is preferable that the winning combination is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the position.

(43) In the push order lottery process (step S405) when the normal replay combination is won, the first stopped reel and the second stopped reel are selected from the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the configuration may be such that only the reel to be stopped first is selected. Even in this case, by configuring the left reel 32L as the first stop, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correct push order will occur by chance.

(44) When the normal replay combination is won, the notification of the push order selected by the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal AT state in addition to or instead of the configuration performed when the normal AT state is in a row. It may be a configuration performed when the above is performed. In this case, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the ON state when the push order is correct when the normal replay combination is won in the situation where the AT1 signal is OFF, so that the AT1 corresponding to the occurrence of the bell prize is generated. There is no need to set the signal to the ON state. Further, in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, the total number of times when the push order is correct at the time of winning the normal replay combination and the number of times when the bell winning occurs is the reference number of times for setting the ON state. In this case, the AT1 signal may be set to the ON state. In this case, when the normal AT state is entered, the timing for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state can be accelerated.

(45) Even in a situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal, it is selected by the main MPU 72 until the value of the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub RAM 84 becomes 1 or more. Instead of the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order different from the pressing order is not executed, the configuration in which the notification of the different pressing order is always performed may be used in the situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting of the OFF / ON state occurs accidentally.

(46) When the bonus AT state is entered in the normal AT state, the output state of the AT1 signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Instead, the output state of the AT1 signal is changed to the ON state. The configuration may be maintained at. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC of the game hall to recognize the number of sets in the normal AT state.

(47) Even in a situation where the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is 1 or more as in the above embodiment, the AT2 signal is temporarily set to the OFF state when one execution time in the bonus AT state is completed. There is a setting difference between the number of remaining sets selected when the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is satisfied and the number of remaining sets selected when the additional condition for the number of remaining sets is satisfied during the bonus AT state. It may be configured as such. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC.

(48) Within the range of the number of remaining sets selected at one time when the condition for transitioning to the bonus AT state or the condition for adding the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is satisfied, one execution of the bonus AT state ends (1 execution time in the bonus AT state ends. Even if 30 games are completed), the AT2 signal may not be set to the OFF state. In this case, the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC displays the total number of times the transition condition to the bonus AT state and the addition condition of the remaining set number of the bonus AT state are satisfied. In the configuration, there may be a setting difference between the transition condition and the addition condition. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC.

(49) The AT1 signal may be set to the OFF state when the number of events on the OFF side defined as a plurality of events in which the bell winning does not occur at the time of winning the first bell combination or the second bell combination occurs. .. In this case, the number of times the bell winning occurs (the number of times on the ON side) required for the AT1 signal to be set to the ON state may be larger than the number of times on the OFF side, and the number of times on the ON side and the number of times on the OFF side may be larger. The number of times may be the same as the number of times of, or the number of times on the OFF side may be larger than the number of times on the ON side.

(50) By enabling the internal state notification unit 63 to display a plurality of types of emission colors, the internal state notification unit 63 may be used to notify various internal states. For example, the bonus AT state generated under the penalty situation may be notified separately from the CB internal post-state. In addition, if there are BB (Big Bonus) and RB (Regular Bonus) roles in addition to the CB role, the winning state will be maintained until a prize is won. , The CB internal rear state, the BB internal rear state, and the RB internal rear state may be notified by the emission color of the internal state notification unit 63.

(51) Instead of the configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is provided aggregated with the acquired number display unit 62, the internal state notification unit 63 may be provided aggregated with the credit display unit 61. Further, the internal state notification unit 63 may be provided separately from the acquired number display unit 62.

(52) When the CB internal rear state is reached, the timing at which the internal state notification unit 63 starts lighting is not limited to before the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and each reel. The lighting may be started after the rotation of the 32L, 32M, 32R is started and before the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is activated, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at the end. The lighting may be started before the reel can be stopped.

(53) If a CB prize is generated when shifting to the bonus AT state, the transition to the bonus AT state may be invalidated.

(54) When shifting to the bonus AT state, or when a CB prize is generated while the bonus AT state is being executed, the number of games consumed in the CB state is calculated from the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state. Although it is subtracted, the number of games that have been digested after the end of the CB in-progress state and before the CB internal post-state is reached may not be subtracted from the number of continuous games.

(55) When the first to third special replay combinations are won and the wait time is set, the wait time is set at the start of the next game of the winning game. It may be configured to be set at the end of the winning game.

(56) In either case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the ON state may be performed at the start of the next game of the game in which the setting condition for the ON state is satisfied. .. Further, in any case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may be performed at the end of the game in which the setting condition to the OFF state is satisfied.

(57) The probability of winning the AT continuation may be notified in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), or an effect capable of predicting the probability may be executed.

(58) In the above embodiment, the privilege of paying out the medal when the small winning combination is established is given, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the player is given some privilege. All you need is. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(59) The present invention may be applied to a so-called A type slot machine, and also B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, RT game and CT. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game.

(60) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be composed even if these are combined. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine, or it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. May be good.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. When the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege numerical information (privilege point) corresponding to the value smaller than the privilege standard value is stored in the privilege storage means (sub-side RAM 84). The first storage execution means (function of executing the processes of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege point counter), and
When the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value, the predetermined privilege granting means (in the sub-side MPU 82) for granting the predetermined privilege advantageous to the player. A function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2301 and executing the subsequent processing, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2609 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the subsequent processing).
When the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the bonus AT state is started, and the additional prize is won by the additional lottery process), the information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is provided. A second storage execution means (a function of executing the processes of step S1904, step S2405, step S2804, step S2810, and step S2904 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege storage means.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, regarding the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the privilege numerical information stored with the establishment of the first privilege numerical condition is accumulated and becomes the information equal to or higher than the privilege standard value. There are cases where a predetermined privilege is granted based on the establishment of the second privilege numerical condition. As a result, the mode of granting the predetermined privilege is diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this case, instead of storing the number of times the predetermined privilege is granted when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value × n is stored in the privilege storage means. As a result, the privilege storage means can be commonly used in the configuration in which the predetermined privilege granting mode is diversified as described above. Therefore, it is possible to aggregate the storage means to be referred to when determining whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. In addition, the required storage capacity can be reduced. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. It is characterized by having a privilege numerical lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S2002 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the privilege numerical information to be stored by the first storage executing means by the privilege numerical lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

According to the feature A2, it is possible to diversify the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and the privilege numerical information is accumulated when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied. When the prescribed benefits are given, it will be diversified.

As a more specific configuration of the feature A2, "there are a plurality of types of the privilege numerical information selected in the privilege numerical lottery process, and the privilege numerical information is information having a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value. Is the configuration.

Feature A3. When the predetermined privilege is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means, the privilege storage means is updated so that the privilege reference numerical value is subtracted (processing of step S2302 and step S2604 in the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature A3, in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used in both the case where the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the case where the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege when the predetermined privilege is given. It is possible to standardize the handling of numerical information. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature A4. The numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is larger than the privilege reference value × (n-1) and smaller than the privilege reference value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). Bonus numerical value notifying means for notifying information corresponding to a numerical value exceeding the privilege reference numerical value × (n-1) in a situation (a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the privilege point notification unit 67 and the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that

According to the feature A4, it is possible for the player to recognize the amount of the privilege numerical information that is less than the given of the predetermined privilege, and how much privilege numerical information is required in the situation where the first privilege numerical condition can be satisfied. It is possible to play the game while clearly recognizing whether or not. This makes it possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player.

Feature A5. A division execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) for dividing a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means by the privilege reference numerical value is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the privilege numerical value notifying means notifies information corresponding to a residual numerical value of a division result by the division executing means.

According to the feature A5, in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used in both the case where the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the case where the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege is given as the privilege numerical information. It is possible to derive numerical values less than the above with a simple processing configuration.

Feature A6. A situation in which the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is the privilege reference value × n or more and smaller than the privilege reference value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more). One of the features A1 to A5, which comprises a privilege number notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the stock notification unit 68 and the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying the information corresponding to the n. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A6, the player can recognize the number of times the predetermined privilege is given, and the superiority complex of the player can be suitably enhanced.

Feature A7. A division execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) for dividing a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means by the privilege reference numerical value is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the privilege number notification means notifies information corresponding to a numerical value of the quotient of the division result by the division execution means.

According to the feature A7, the number of times the predetermined privilege is given is simple in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used in both the case where the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the case where the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied. It can be derived by the processing configuration.

Feature A8. The first privilege numerical condition is satisfied in the gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the first privilege.
As a result of the memory processing of the privilege numerical information to the privilege storage means being executed by the first storage execution means in the gaming state corresponding to the first privilege, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is the privilege. When the information is equal to or greater than the reference value, the means for shifting to the game state (additional state) corresponding to the second privilege in which the second privilege numerical condition can be satisfied (the processing of steps S2104 to S2107 in the sub-side MPU 82 is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, which comprises a function and a function of executing the processing of steps S261 to S2614 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature A8, there are a gaming state in which the first privilege numerical condition can be satisfied and a gaming state in which the second privilege numerical condition can be satisfied, so that the gaming state can be diversified. In addition, since the privilege numerical information becomes information equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value in the game state corresponding to the first privilege, the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the second privilege, so that both game states can be closely related.

Feature A9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
At least one of the first privilege numerical condition and the second privilege numerical condition is a prize as a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated, or after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is characterized in that it is established according to the result.

In a gaming machine such as the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature A10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
The game machine
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The predetermined privilege is described in feature A9, wherein the game can be executed in a game state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is performed. Game machine.

Feature In a gaming machine such as A10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A storage execution means (sub) that stores the privilege numerical information (privilege points) in the privilege storage means (privilege point counter of the sub side RAM 84) when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege points are won in the privilege point lottery process). The function of executing the processes of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the side MPU 82) and
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. And the function to execute the process of step S2609),
When the information is determined by the privilege standard determination means to correspond to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value, a predetermined privilege granting means (step in the sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player. A function of making an affirmative judgment in S2301 and executing the subsequent processing, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2609 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the subsequent processing).
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value can be inherited even after the determination trigger.

According to the feature B1, since the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege numerical information stored when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied becomes the information corresponding to the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard numerical value, the player has the privilege numerical condition. The game is played while expecting that it will be established, and the game is played while expecting that the privilege numerical information will be information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard numerical value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the privilege numerical information corresponding to the value less than the privilege standard value can be inherited even after the determination trigger. As a result, there are many opportunities for the privilege numerical information to be information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value, and there is an opportunity to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the privilege numerical information can be information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value. It is possible to generate many. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a privilege numerical condition, in a configuration provided with "a privilege numerical lottery means for executing a privilege numerical lottery process (a function of executing a privilege point lottery process in the sub-side RAM 84), the privilege numerical lottery process is won. That is the condition. Further, the configuration may be such that "the privilege numerical information determined by the privilege numerical lottery process is stored in the privilege storage means".

Feature B2. The storage execution means according to feature B1 is characterized in that, when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege storage means stores privilege numerical information corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value. Game machine.

According to the feature B2, by accumulating the privilege numerical information acquired when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege numerical information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more can be obtained. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the privilege numerical condition a plurality of times in order to obtain the privilege numerical information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more, and it is possible to gradually raise the expectation of the player.

Feature B3. The above-mentioned privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is satisfied in the gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the privilege.
It is a configuration in which one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege ends after the determination trigger.
Feature B1 or B2 characterized in that the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means in the privilege corresponding game state in a predetermined execution time can be taken over to the privilege corresponding game state in the next execution time. The game machine described in.

According to the feature B3, since the privilege numerical information acquired in one execution time of the privilege-supporting game state can be taken over to the privilege-supporting game state in the next execution time, it is acquired just before the end of the privilege-supporting game state. It is possible to enjoy the profits even if the privilege numerical information is obtained. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the privilege numerical condition at any timing of the game state corresponding to the privilege.

Feature B4. When the continuation condition is satisfied, a new execution time of the game state corresponding to the privilege is started after one execution time of the game state corresponding to the privilege is completed.
When the continuation condition is satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is continued, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is inherited to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation. The gaming machine described in B3.

According to the feature B4, when the privilege-supporting game state is consecutively villaged, the privilege numerical information is inherited to the privilege-supported game state after the continuation, so that the profit is increased when the privilege-supported game state is consecutively villaged. It becomes possible to raise the expectation that the game state corresponding to the privilege will be in a row.

Feature B5. The game state corresponding to the privilege is a game state in which the degree of expectation of granting the game medium is higher than the predetermined game state.
When the predetermined privilege granting means is determined by the privilege standard determining means to be information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value, it is assumed that the continuation condition is satisfied, and one execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein a new execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is started after the end of the game.

According to the feature B5, since the privilege numerical information becomes the information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more, the gaming state corresponding to the privilege will be in a row, so the game is performed while expecting that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied. It will be.

Feature B6. The description in feature B5, wherein the continuation condition is different from the condition that the information corresponds to the value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value by the privilege standard determination means. Game machine.

According to the feature B6, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the information corresponding to the privilege standard numerical value or more, if other continuation conditions are satisfied, the game state corresponding to the privilege can be continued, so that the gaming state corresponding to the privilege can be continued. It is possible to give many opportunities for people to stay in a row. In addition, even if other continuation conditions are met and the privilege-supporting game state continues, the privilege-compatible game state will be inherited to the privilege-supported game state after the continuation. It is possible to give many opportunities to stay in a row.

Feature B7. Even if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means can be taken over to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege generated by a new start trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4 to B6.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to give many opportunities for the privilege numerical information to be inherited.

Feature B8. When the continuation condition is not satisfied, the takeover lottery means (the process of step S4001 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines by the takeover lottery process whether or not to store and retain the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the feature B8, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the privilege numerical information is inherited.

Feature B9. It is found that when the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a large value, the probability of being inherited after the determination trigger is higher than when the information corresponds to a small value. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to feature B9, even if the privilege numerical information corresponding to less than the privilege standard value is used as a trigger for judgment, the probability that the value of the privilege numerical information at that time is large is higher than that of the case where the value is small. Since it will be high, it is advantageous to set the numerical value of the privilege numerical information as large as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the privilege numerical condition is satisfied.

Feature B10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
The feature B1 is characterized in that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied according to the result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of B9.

Feature In a gaming machine such as B10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature B11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
The game machine
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Feature In a gaming machine such as B11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A10, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1706 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function to execute the processing of S1709) and
When a continuous lottery trigger occurs, a continuous lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous game state after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
When the continuous lottery process results in a continuous loss, a predetermined transfer means (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting to the predetermined game state after the elapse of the period after the continuous loss has elapsed.
When the continuation condition is satisfied in the post-continuation period, the advantageous continuation means (a function of executing the pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state, and
With
The continuous lottery execution means re-executes the continuous lottery process when the continuation condition is satisfied and a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started in the middle of the period after the continuation is lost. A game machine characterized by that.

According to feature C1, it is advantageous not only when the continuous winning is won in the continuous lottery process, but also when the continuous condition is satisfied in the post-continuation period when the continuous loss occurs. The game state is a series of villas. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous gaming state stays in a row, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous gaming state to stay in a row.

In addition, even if the continuation lottery process results in a continuous loss, if the continuation condition is satisfied during the subsequent continuation loss period and the advantageous gaming state continues, the opportunity for the continuous lottery process to be executed again Granted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state will end, and it is possible to suitably maintain the expectation of the player in the advantageous gaming state. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, one execution time in the advantageous game state may be configured to end when the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is set to one game in which the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means is started and ended. In this case, the game may be digested a predetermined number of times, or the game may be completed by the end lottery process.

Further, the post-continuation period may be a period in which a plurality of predetermined games are executed when the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means is started and ended as one game, and after the continuation is discontinued in this period. The effect indicating that it is a period may be executed by the effect execution means.

Feature C2. It is provided with a probability improving means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) to increase the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process.
When the continuation condition is satisfied and a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state is started in the middle of the post-continuation period, the probability improving means is used until the continuous lottery process is executed again. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the probability of continuous winning can be increased.

According to the feature C2, when the continuation condition is satisfied during the continuation out period and the advantageous gaming state is consecutive, not only the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process is given again, but also the continuous lottery to be executed again is given. The probability of continuous winning in processing can be high. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the player when the continuation condition is satisfied during the continuation off period.

Feature C3. Described in feature C2, the probability improving means sets the probability of continuous winning to the highest probability when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are repeated and the highest probability setting condition is satisfied. Game machine.

According to the feature C3, the advantageous gaming state becomes a more advantageous state for the player by staying in a row. As a result, the benefit of being given the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process again is enhanced, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even during the non-continuous lottery period.

In addition, there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types of probabilities of continuous winning.

Feature C4. The probability improving means is
A first probability improving means (a function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) that can increase the probability of being continuously won when the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, and
A second probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning the continuation, provided that at least one condition is that a new execution of the advantageous gaming state occurs even if the continuation lottery process results in a loss of continuation. (Function to execute the process of step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
The gaming machine according to the feature C2 or C3, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C2 or C3.

According to the feature C4, in both the case where the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning and the advantageous gaming state continues, and the case where the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state continues in the consecutive villas. , The probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process can be high. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the advantageous gaming state will be in a row.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the second probability improving means has a larger increase in the probability of continuous winning than the first probability improving means.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to increase the profit when the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state is continued even though the continuation off period has been reached.

Feature C6. A specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of executions of the advantageous gaming state is provided.
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature C6, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process at the time of the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuous lottery process results in continuous loss.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the continuation condition is that the information stored in the specific storage means becomes information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to generate an event that a continuous villa in an advantageous gaming state occurs after the start of the post-continuation period while using the information indicating the number of remaining executions.

Feature C8. When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the memory execution means (step S2005, step S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , Function to execute the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. And the function to execute the process of step S2609),
With
When it is determined by the privilege standard determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the continuation condition is that the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value.

According to the feature C8, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical information becomes a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value in the period after the continuation is lost. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous gaming state will be in a row. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger, so that the privilege numerical information has a larger value before the judgment trigger. The game will be played while expecting the above, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature C9. In the case of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, any one of the features C1 to C8 is characterized in that the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are started after the lapse of the post-continuation period. Described game machine.

According to the feature C9, it is possible to teach the player that the winning has been continued.

In addition, the continuation hit-and-go period may be a period in which a predetermined plurality of games are executed when the variable display of the picture in the picture display means is started and ended as one game, and the continuation hit-and-go period may be used in this period. The effect indicating that it is a period may be executed by the effect execution means.

Feature C10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
The continuation condition is satisfied according to the result of the lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

Features In a gaming machine such as C10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature C11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
The game machine
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Features In a game machine such as C11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1706 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function to execute the processing of S1709) and
When a continuous lottery trigger occurs, a continuous lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous game state after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
A function of executing the processes of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82 to increase the probability of winning the continuation, provided that the continuation of the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state occurs. )When,
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, if the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, the advantageous gaming state will be consecutive, so the player will play the game while expecting that the continuous lottery process will result in continuous winning. The interest of the game will be improved.

In this case, if the advantageous gaming state is consecutive, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process can be improved. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is consecutive villas, the consecutive villas are more likely to occur, and the advantage of having the advantageous gaming state consecutive villas is enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player when the advantageous gaming state is in a row. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the probability improving means increases the probability of winning the continuous winning, provided that the winning is continuous in the continuous lottery process.

According to the feature D2, the probability of being continuously won is increased by being continuously won in the continuous lottery process. As a result, the player's attention to whether or not the continuous lottery process will result in continuous winning is increased.

Feature D3. The probability improving means is
Probability lottery execution means for executing the continuation probability lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82), provided that the continuation winning is achieved in the continuation lottery process.
A probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) that increases the probability of continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process
The gaming machine according to the feature D2, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature D3, in order to set a high probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, a continuous winning is set in the continuous lottery process, and a high probability of continuous winning is set in the continuous probability lottery process. Need to be the result for. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the probability that the probability of continuous winning is set high is increased.

Feature D4. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (AT state before branching) and a second advantageous period (AT state before branching) that follows.
The continuous lottery execution means executes the continuous lottery process when the first advantageous period ends.
The gaming machine uses the effect executing means (image display device 66) to produce an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing the process of step S1109 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be executed.
When a specific effect (winning effect) is executed as the advantageous period effect, there is another possibility that the probability of winning the continuous winning is increased or the probability of winning the continuous winning is increased by the probability improving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, which is characterized in that it is higher than when the effect is executed.

According to the feature D4, in the second advantageous period of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state is continuously executed is executed, so that the advantageous gaming state is in a row. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the game is played, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when a specific effect is executed as an advantageous period effect, the probability of continuous winning is high or is high. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a specific effect will occur, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature D5. The effect control means
The effect lottery execution means (the function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the effect content lottery process when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning,
Specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting the specific effect as an effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process.
A predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process.
With
The probability improving means is
When the specific effect is set as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period, the probability lottery execution means for executing the continuation probability lottery process (the function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
Probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for improving the probability of continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process, and
The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that

According to the feature D5, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state are determined, so that the player expects that the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed. The game will be played. Further, when the specific effect is executed among the specific effect and the predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process is high, so that the player further executes the specific effect. You will play the game while expecting that. As a result, the player's expectation can be made multi-stage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D6. Described in feature D4 or D5, wherein the probability improving means sets the probability of continuous winning to the highest probability when the number of times the specific effect is executed reaches a predetermined number of times of execution. Game machine.

According to the feature D6, since the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of executions, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process is the highest probability, and therefore the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed. Can be increased.

In addition, there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types of probabilities of continuous winning.

Feature D7. A specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of executions of the advantageous gaming state is provided.
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature D7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process at the time of the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuous lottery process results in continuous loss.

Feature D8. When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times and a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started, the probability improving means is said to be a continuous winning. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the setting for increasing the probability of becoming a player is not performed.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to prevent an unnecessarily large number of opportunities to be set with a high probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process.

Feature D9. When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the memory execution means (step S2005, step S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , Function to execute the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. And the function to execute the process of step S2609),
With
When it is determined by the privilege standard determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. And
Even if the continuous lottery process results in a continuous loss, the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent period after the continuous loss corresponds to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. If this happens, the feature D7 or D8 is characterized by having an advantageous continuation means (a function of executing a pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state. The game machine described.

According to the feature D9, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical information becomes a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value in the period after the continuation is lost. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous gaming state will be in a row. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger, so that the privilege numerical information has a larger value before the judgment trigger. The game will be played while expecting the above, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature D10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
The game according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein in the advantageous gaming state, a game in which the variable display of the symbol is stopped is executed a plurality of times after the variable display of the symbol is started. Machine.

Feature In a gaming machine such as D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature D11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
The game machine
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Feature In a gaming machine such as D11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1706 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function to execute the processing of S1709) and
When a continuous lottery trigger occurs, a continuous lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous game state after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
Specific storage means (privilege point counter of sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the remaining number of executions of the advantageous gaming state, and
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, or when the continuous lottery process is continuously won, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started. Advantageous continuation means (a function to execute the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-side MPU 82) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, not only the advantageous gaming state is consecutively villaged when the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, but also the information stored in the specific storage means has a remaining number of executions of 1 or more. Even if the information is provided, the advantageous gaming state will continue. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous gaming state stays in a row, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous gaming state to stay in a row. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. When the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are repeated and the probability improvement condition is satisfied, the probability improvement means for increasing the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process (execution of the processes of step S2308 and step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the feature E2, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process can be improved by having the advantageous gaming states in a row. That is, the more the number of remaining executions is set and the more advantageous game states are in a row, the higher the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is consecutive villas, the consecutive villas are more likely to occur, and the advantage of having the advantageous gaming state consecutive villas is enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player when the advantageous gaming state is in a row. In addition, it is possible to closely relate the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state related to the number of remaining executions and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting both consecutive villa modes is synergistic. It becomes possible to do.

Feature E3. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (AT state before branching) and a second advantageous period (AT state before branching) that follows.
When the first advantageous period ends, the advantageous continuation means determines whether or not the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, or in the continuous lottery process. It is to judge whether or not it has been won continuously.
The gaming machine uses the effect executing means (image display device 66) to produce an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing the process of step S1109 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be executed.
The production control means
An effect lottery execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the effect content lottery process when the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continuously executed.
Specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a specific effect (winning effect) as an effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process.
A predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process.
With
The game machine performs a probability improving means (processing of step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82) for increasing the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process when the number of times the specific effect is executed reaches a predetermined number of executions. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, which comprises a function to execute).

According to the feature E3, in the second advantageous period of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state is continuously executed is executed, so that the advantageous gaming state is in a row. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the game is played, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state are determined, so that the player plays the game while expecting that the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed. Will be. In addition, since the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of executions, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process increases, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed. Become.

Further, since the specific effect is executed even when the advantageous gaming state continues because the remaining number of executions is one or more, the more the number of remaining executions is set, the more the specific effect is executed. Expectations for the number of times are increased. Therefore, if a large number of remaining executions is set, not only the benefit of increasing the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state, but also the benefit of increasing the possibility of improving the probability of continuous winning will be given. The advantage of setting a large number of times as the remaining number of executions is enhanced.

Feature E4. The game according to feature E3, which comprises an execution number notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the win number notification unit 69 and the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying the number of times the specific effect is executed. Machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of executions.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, wherein the probability improving means sets the probability of continuous winning to the highest probability.

According to the feature E5, the advantage of having a continuous villa in an advantageous gaming state is enhanced.

Feature E6. Any of the features E1 to E5 characterized in that the remaining number of times corresponding notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the stock notification unit 68 and the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying the information corresponding to the remaining number of executions is provided. The game machine described in 1.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to recognize at least how much the advantageous gaming state is in a row through the remaining number of times corresponding notification means, and it is possible to enhance the superiority complex of the player.

In particular, when the configuration of the above feature E3 is provided, the player himself / herself determines the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will be the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions grasped by the remaining number correspondence notification means. It becomes possible to recognize. This makes it possible to closely relate the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state related to the number of remaining executions and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting both consecutive villa modes is synergistic. It becomes possible to.

Feature E7. When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the advantageous continuation means does not execute the continuous lottery process and is a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the game is started.

According to the feature E7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process at the time of the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being unnecessarily extended as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuous lottery process results in continuous loss.

Feature E8. When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the memory execution means (step S2005, step S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , Function to execute the processing of step S2011 and step S2504),
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. And the function to execute the process of step S2609),
With
When the privilege standard determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the advantageous continuation means newly executes the advantageous gaming state without executing the continuation lottery process. Even if the round is started and the continuation is lost in the continuous lottery process, the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent period after the continuation loss. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7, characterized in that when the information corresponds to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started. ..

According to the feature E8, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical information becomes a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value in the period after the continuation is lost. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous gaming state will be in a row. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger, so that the privilege numerical information has a larger value before the judgment trigger. The game will be played while expecting the above, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature E9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
The game according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein in the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the symbol is stopped is executed a plurality of times after the variable display of the symbol is started. Machine.

In a gaming machine such as the feature E9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature E10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
The game machine
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Feature In a game machine such as E10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A storage execution means (sub) that stores the privilege numerical information (privilege points) in the privilege storage means (privilege point counter of the sub side RAM 84) when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege points are won in the privilege point lottery process). The function of executing the processes of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the side MPU 82) and
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. And the function to execute the process of step S2609),
When the information is determined by the privilege standard determination means to correspond to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value, a predetermined privilege granting means (step in the sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player. A function of making an affirmative judgment in S2301 and executing the subsequent processing, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2609 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the subsequent processing).
Grant lottery execution means (sub side) that executes a grant lottery process for whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege when the information is not determined by the privilege standard determination means to correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. (Function to execute the process of step S2907 in MPU82) and
With
The game characterized in that the grant lottery execution means executes the grant lottery process so that the probability of winning the grant in the grant lottery process differs depending on the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means. Machine.

According to the feature F1, since the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege numerical information stored when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied becomes the information corresponding to the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard numerical value, the player has the privilege numerical condition. The game is played while expecting that it will be established, and the game is played while expecting that the privilege numerical information will be information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard numerical value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the information does not correspond to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value, the predetermined privilege is given by winning the grant in the grant lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the predetermined privilege is granted, and it is possible to provide many opportunities for the predetermined privilege to be granted.

Furthermore, the grant lottery process is executed so that the probability of winning the grant differs depending on the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information. As a result, even if the privilege numerical information corresponds to a value less than the privilege standard value, the probability that the privilege numerical information will be awarded in the grant lottery process will be affected, and the degree of attention to the privilege numerical information will be affected. Can be increased.

From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The grant lottery execution means is such that the probability of winning the grant in the grant lottery process is higher when the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means is larger than when it is smaller. The gaming machine according to the feature F1, which is characterized in that it executes the above.

According to the feature F2, even if the privilege numerical information corresponds to a value less than the privilege reference value, the value having the larger privilege numerical information has a higher probability of being awarded in the grant lottery process. As a result, even when the privilege numerical information does not correspond to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the privilege numerical information.

Feature F3. When the grant is won in the grant lottery process and the predetermined privilege is granted, an erasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2911 in the sub-side MPU 82) for erasing the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is provided. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to limit the profit caused by the privilege numerical information to some extent.

Feature F4. The above-mentioned privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is satisfied in the gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the privilege.
It is a configuration in which one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege ends after the determination trigger.
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means can be inherited when the grant lottery process is not executed or the grant is not won in the grant lottery process.

According to the feature F4, if the grant lottery process is not executed or if the grant lottery process does not result in the grant winning, the privilege numerical information can be inherited. Therefore, in relation to the grant lottery process, the privilege numerical information The transfer mode will be diversified. As a result, the progress mode of the game will be diversified in relation to the privilege numerical information, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature F5. The privilege numerical condition is configured to be established in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state).
The predetermined privilege is that the advantageous gaming state continues.
A feature F1 to F4 characterized in that it is provided with a means for ending the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) when the grant is not won in the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature F5, the grant lottery process exists as the final opportunity to generate the consecutive villas in the advantageous gaming state, and the degree of attention to the grant lottery process is increased. In addition, even if the privilege numerical information is acquired just before the end of the advantageous gaming state by referring to the privilege numerical information in the grant lottery process that exists as the final opportunity to generate the consecutive villa in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to enjoy the benefits of it. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to satisfy the privilege numerical condition at any timing of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature F6. When a continuous lottery trigger occurs, a continuous lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous game state after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. A means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82) is provided.
When it is determined by the privilege standard determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. Yes,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the granting lottery executing means executes the granting lottery process after the continuous lottery process results in a continuous loss.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the advantageous gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature F7. Even if the continuous lottery process results in a continuous loss, the privilege numerical information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent period after the continuous loss corresponds to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started when the game becomes stable.

According to the feature F7, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical information becomes a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard value in the period after the continuation is lost. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous gaming state will be in a row. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information to a larger value before the judgment trigger, so that the privilege numerical information has a larger value before the judgment trigger. The game will be played while expecting the above, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature F8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
The granting lottery executing means is given so that the probability of winning the grant differs depending on not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means but also the result of the combination lottery process or the winning result in the game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the lottery process is executed.

According to the feature F8, not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information but also the winning combination or the winning result in the corresponding game affects the probability of winning the grant in the grant lottery process. As a result, points to be noted when executing the grant lottery process will be diversified, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature F9. If the result of the winning combination lottery process in the corresponding game is a specific winning combination, or if a specific winning combination is won and the granting lottery process does not result in the winning, the granting lottery process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F8, which comprises means for increasing the number of continuous games in the state (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2912 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature F9, even if the specific combination is won or the specific combination is won but the grant is not won in the grant lottery process, the number of continuous games in which the grant lottery process is executed can be increased. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player when the specific combination is won or the specific combination is won but the grant is not won in the grant lottery process.

Feature F10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
The feature F1 is characterized in that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied according to the result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of F9.

Features In a gaming machine such as F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Features F11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
The game machine
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Features In a gaming machine such as F11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A combination lottery execution means for executing a combination lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Winning correspondence granting means (a function of executing the winning judgment processing in the main MPU 72) for granting the winning correspondence privilege corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process, and
The advantage of the player is higher than that of the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), provided that the predetermined combination (normal replay combination) is won in the combination lottery process in the transition expected state (transition chance state). Advantageous transition means (functions of executing the processes of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to a high advantageous gaming state (normal AT state), and
Expected to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur in the transition expected state, provided that at least one condition is that another combination (expectation improving combination) has been won in the combination lottery process in the transition expected state. Degree improvement means (function to execute the processing of step S1605 and step S1606 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, the transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur by winning the predetermined combination in the transition expected state. As a result, the game is played while expecting to win a predetermined role in the expected transition state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, if another role is won in the expected transition state, the expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur in the expected transition state increases, so that the player may win not only the predetermined role but also another role in the expected transition state. Expectations will be made, and the roles expected to be won will be diversified. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The game according to feature G1, wherein the expectation level improving means extends the duration of the transition expected state, provided that the winning combination is won in the winning combination process. Machine.

According to the feature G2, since the duration of the transition expected state can be extended when another role is won, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur.

Feature G3. It is provided with a transition lottery execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1609 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the transition lottery process when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process in the transition expected state.
The advantageous transition means shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the transition is won in the transition lottery process.
The feature G1 is characterized in that the expectation level improving means increases the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process, provided that the winning of another combination in the combination lottery process is at least one condition. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

According to the feature G3, when a separate winning combination is won, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process can be increased, so that it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the probability of winning the predetermined winning combination is higher than the probability of winning the other winning combination at least in the expected transition state.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a predetermined combination in the expected transition state, and it is possible to give many opportunities to expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state. Further, when a winning combination with a low winning probability is won, a situation advantageous for the player may generally occur. However, another role having the above-mentioned feature G1 configuration and having a lower winning probability than the predetermined winning combination. If the player wins, the expectation of transition to the advantageous gaming state is high, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the player wins another role.

Feature G5. The predetermined combination is described in any one of the features G1 to G4, which serves as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in the expected transition state, but does not serve as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in other gaming states. Game machine.

According to the feature G5, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning a predetermined combination in the expected transition state.

Feature G6. The game according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the separate combination does not serve as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in the expected transition state, but serves as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in other gaming states. Machine.

According to the feature G6, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the different role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the different role.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the winning correspondence granting means grants a predetermined winning correspondence privilege when the predetermined winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process.

According to the feature G7, it is possible to increase the advantage in the case of becoming a predetermined combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the predetermined combination.

Feature G8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The symbol display means is arranged so that the variable display of the symbol is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means to control (a function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
With
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated.
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning correspondence privilege as a prize generation when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7.

Features In a gaming machine such as the G8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature G9. The feature G8 is characterized in that when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, a prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. The game machine described in.

According to the feature G9, when the predetermined combination is won, the corresponding prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means, so that the player clearly knows that the opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state has occurred. It becomes possible to recognize.

Feature G10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, an order-corresponding combination (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enables a prize to be generated when the variable display of patterns in the plurality of variable display units is stopped in a predetermined order Role) exists,
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or G9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is won.

Features In a gaming machine such as the G10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
A special waiting period (start wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game when a special event occurs in which the combination lottery process results in a special lottery result or the stop result of the pattern becomes a special stop result. (Functions for executing the processes of steps S805 to S806, steps S812 to S813, and steps S906 to S907 in the main MPU 72) and
When the special event occurs in the waiting avoidance situation (when the value of the bonus AT counter is 1 or more, the penalty situation), the special waiting period is not set by the special waiting period setting means, or the above Wait avoidance means for setting a waiting period shorter than the special waiting period (a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S804 of the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S811, and a negative judgment in step S901). Function to make a negative judgment in step S902, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step S905)
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to feature H1, it is emphasized that a special event has occurred through the setting of the special waiting period by setting a special waiting period when a special event that is either winning a special role or winning a special role occurs. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the player feels unexpected that the special waiting period has been set, and the feeling of excitement for the occurrence of the special event is enhanced. On the other hand, when the special waiting period is set, the progress of the game is waited, which may make the player think that it is troublesome. On the other hand, in such a situation, the special waiting period can be generated in a preferable situation by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature H2. The special waiting period setting means causes the measurement of the special waiting period to start after the variable display of the pattern is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the pattern during the special standby period.

According to the feature H2, when the special waiting period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special waiting period is set. .. On the other hand, if the special waiting period is set in an unfavorable situation, the variable display of the pattern is not started even though the game is about to start, which may make it annoying. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period.

Feature H3. It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1109 and S1206 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the effect execution means to execute the special event response effect during the special standby period. Features The gaming machine according to H1 or H2.

According to the feature H3, since the special event response effect is executed during the special waiting period, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling that the special event has occurred. On the other hand, if a special waiting period is set in an unfavorable situation and a special event response effect is executed, the player may be uncomfortable. In such a situation, the special waiting period should not be set. By doing so or shortening the waiting period, the special event response effect is not executed either.

Feature H4. When the special event occurs in a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), an advantageous transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state. The side MPU 72 is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904).
When the special event occurs in the advantageous gaming state, the number of executions of the advantageous gaming state can be increased, or the number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state can be increased.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the standby avoidance situation is a situation in which the game is in an advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature H4, by setting a special waiting period for the occurrence of a special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, the special waiting period is emphasized for the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the game state is separated. Will exist, and it can have the effect of enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. On the other hand, in the advantageous gaming state, the player's consciousness is directed toward the digestion of the game, so if a special waiting period is set for the occurrence of a special event in the middle, it may make the player think that it is troublesome. There is sex. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period.

Feature H5. When the special event occurs in a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), an advantageous transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state. (Functions for executing the processes of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904) in the side MPU 72).
When the special event occurs in a penalty situation, a transition regulating means that regulates the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state by the advantageous transition means (a function of making a negative determination in step S901 in the main MPU 72). , And the function of making a negative judgment in step S902),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the standby avoidance situation is the penalty situation.

According to the feature H5, by setting a special waiting period for the occurrence of a special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, the special waiting period is emphasized for the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the game state is separated. Will exist, and it can have the effect of enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. On the other hand, even if a special event occurs in the penalty situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur, so if the special waiting period is set in such a situation, the player may be uncomfortable. .. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring by not setting the special waiting period or shortening the waiting period.

Feature H6. As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Features In a gaming machine such as H6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature H7. When the special lottery result is obtained, the pre-start waiting period setting means (in the main MPU 72) that waits for the variable display of the pattern until the pre-start waiting period (first freeze time, second freeze time) elapses in the game. A function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S408) is provided.
Any of the features H1 to H6, wherein the pre-start waiting period setting means sets the pre-start waiting period when the special lottery result is obtained even in the waiting avoidance situation. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature H7, when the special lottery result is obtained, the waiting period before the start is set in the game, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special lottery result has been obtained. As a result, the player can feel unexpected and uplifted about the setting of the waiting period before the start, and stop the game while recognizing that it is the result of the special lottery. Is possible. Further, since such a function of the pre-start waiting period can occur regardless of whether or not it is in the waiting avoidance situation, the function is preferably generated by setting the pre-start waiting period even in the waiting avoidance situation. It becomes possible to make it.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features I1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group can solve the following problems. Is.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that the player is made to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display units (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a picture, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding variable display unit.
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing the reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
In a game machine equipped with
As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, if a winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, a specified winning combination is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display units (normal replay combination). ) Exists
A first control means (main side MPU 72) having the variable display control means and a second control means (sub side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means are provided. ,
The first control means
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display units should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function of executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72). When,
The order specifying means for identifying the occurrence of the correct answer order event in which the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display units is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means (executes the normal replay push order determination process in the main MPU 72). Function to do) and
With
The second control means
An order notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1109 and S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82) that causes the selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means to be notified, and
A notification determining means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining whether or not to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

In this case, in the first control means, the order in which the variable display of the symbol should be stopped is intentionally selected when the prescribed winning combination is won regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the symbol, and the second control is performed. In the means, control is performed as needed so that the selection order information is notified. Then, in the first control means, it is specified whether or not the selected order and the actual stop order match. As a result, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state does not need to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

From the above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process.

According to the feature I2, when the prescribed combination is won, the order is always selected, so that it is not necessary to switch between the situation where the order is selected and the situation where the order is not selected. Is simplified.

Feature I3. The second control means executes the process during AT in the progress management means (sub-side MPU 82) that manages the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function to do)
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the notification determining means notifies the selection order information by the order notification control means according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature I3, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above feature I1, information from the second control means to the first control means even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means. It is possible to grasp the progress of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means without requiring the transmission of the above.

Feature I4. The progress management means is set to continue so that when the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started after one execution of the advantageous gaming state is completed. It is provided with means (a function of setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911).
The notification determining means is characterized in that the selection order information is notified by the order notification control means in a situation where the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature I4, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to grasp the occurrence of the state of the consecutive villas.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the defined combination is a combination having the highest probability of being won in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the chances that the progress status of the advantageous gaming state is grasped by the first control means, and when the progress status of the advantageous gaming state changes, it is early in the first control means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature I6. As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

According to the feature I6, it is possible to surely generate the order-corresponding winning combination in the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature I7. The first control means is a specific output setting means (step S3112 and step in the main MPU 72) that sets an external output for a specific response based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred is specified by the order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, which comprises a function of executing the process of S3404).

According to the feature I7, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the game does not require the transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to set the external output corresponding to the progress of the state in the first control means.

Feature I8. The specific output setting means is characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order specifying means. The game machine described in.

According to feature I8, the possibility that a specific corresponding external output setting is made when a correct order event occurs by chance is reduced.

Feature I9. In the specific output setting means, the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means without the event that the correct order event does not occur when the predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the above.

According to feature I9, the possibility that a specific corresponding external output setting is made when a correct order event occurs by chance is reduced.

Feature I10. The second control means is a process of step S3507 and step S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82 so that the out-of-order information corresponding to the order different from the order selected by the order selection means is notified. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, which comprises a function of executing the above.

According to the feature I10, it is possible to positively prevent the occurrence of the correct order event by chance, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means.

Feature I11. The second control means executes the process during AT in the progress management means (sub-side MPU 82) that manages the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function to do)
The notification determining means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the out-of-order notification control means is for causing the out-of-order information to be notified according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature I11, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous gaming state does not need to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature I12. The progress management means is set to continue so that when the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started after one execution of the advantageous gaming state is completed. It is provided with means (a function of setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911).
The notification determining means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means.
The out-of-order notification control means is characterized in that the out-of-order information is notified in a situation different from the situation in which the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I11.

According to the feature I12, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game does not require the transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state of the consecutive villas.

Feature I13. The first control means executes the specific response process (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72 based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the sequence specifying means. It has a function to execute the processing of
The second control means includes a second side order specifying means for identifying that the correct order event has occurred (a function of executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-side MPU 82).
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified based on the fact that the correct order event has been identified by the second side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I10 to I12.

According to the feature I13, since the first control means executes the specific correspondence process when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the specific correspondence process is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance. It will be reduced. Further, in the second control means, the out-of-order notification is executed when the correct order event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being executed more than necessary.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein when the player wins the prescribed combination, a prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. ..

According to the feature I14, by deliberately selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the so-called missing ruler is won, the player's profit depends on whether or not the selection order information is notified. It does not fluctuate. As a result, restrictions on notifying the selection order information are unlikely to occur.

Feature I15. The plurality of variable display units include a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R).
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14, wherein the order selection means does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

According to the feature I15, since the player generally stops the left variable display unit first, the correct answer order event occurs by chance by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit. It is possible to reduce the possibility of doing so.

Feature I16. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I15, wherein the defined combination is a replaying combination.

According to the feature I16, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned action and effect by utilizing the replaying combination.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features I1 to I16, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H7, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display units (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a picture, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding variable display unit.
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing the reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
In a game machine equipped with
As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, if a winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, a specified winning combination is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display units (normal replay combination). ) Exists
A first control means (main side MPU 72) having the variable display control means and a second control means (sub side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means are provided. ,
The first control means
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display units should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function of executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72). When,
The order specifying means for identifying the occurrence of the correct answer order event in which the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display units is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means (executes the normal replay push order determination process in the main MPU 72). Function to do) and
With
The second control means
An order notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1109 and S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82) that causes the selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means to be notified, and
An out-of-order notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying out-of-order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

In this case, the first control means intentionally selects the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the specified winning combination is won, in which the specified prize occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the pattern. The second control means may notify the selected order, or may notify the order different from the selected order. Then, in the first control means, it is specified whether or not the selected order and the actual stop order match. As a result, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state does not need to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

In particular, by notifying the out-of-order information, it is possible to positively prevent the occurrence of the correct order event by chance, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means. Become.

From the above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Feature J2. The second control means executes the process during AT in the progress management means (sub-side MPU 82) that manages the progress of the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function to do)
The order notification control means is intended to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the out-of-order notification control means is for notifying the out-of-order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature J2, since the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous gaming state does not need to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Features J3. The progress management means is set to continue so that when the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started after one execution of the advantageous gaming state is completed. It is provided with means (a function of setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911).
The order notification control means notifies the selection order information when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means.
The out-of-order notification control means is characterized in that the out-of-order information is notified in a situation different from the situation in which the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means. Feature The gaming machine described in J2.

According to the feature J3, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state of the consecutive villas.

Features J4. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein the defined combination is a combination having the highest probability of being won in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to increase the chances that the progress status of the advantageous gaming state is grasped by the first control means, and when the progress status of the advantageous gaming state changes, it is early in the first control means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature J5. As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

According to the feature J5, it is possible to surely generate the order-corresponding winning combination in the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

Features J6. The first control means executes the specific response process (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72 based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the sequence specifying means. It has a function to execute the processing of
The second control means includes a second side order specifying means for identifying that the correct order event has occurred (a function of executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-side MPU 82).
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified based on the fact that the correct order event has been identified by the second side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J5.

According to the feature J6, since the first control means executes the specific correspondence process when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the specific correspondence process is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance. It will be reduced. Further, in the second control means, the out-of-order notification is executed when the correct order event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being executed more than necessary.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process.

According to the feature J7, when the prescribed combination is won, the order is always selected, so that the processing content is grasped in order to grasp the progress of the game state independently managed by the second control means. There is no need to change. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Features J8. The first control means is a specific output setting means (step S3112 and step in the main MPU 72) that sets an external output for a specific response based on the fact that the correct order event has been identified by the order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of S3404).

According to the feature J8, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the game does not require the transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to set the external output corresponding to the progress of the state in the first control means.

Features J9. The specific output setting means is characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order specifying means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature J9, the possibility that a specific corresponding external output setting is performed when a correct order event occurs by chance is reduced.

Features J10. In the specific output setting means, the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means without the event that the correct order event does not occur when the predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to feature J9, characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the above.

According to the feature J10, the possibility that a specific corresponding external output setting is performed when a correct order event occurs by chance is reduced.

Features J11. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, wherein when the player wins the prescribed combination, a prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. ..

According to the feature J11, by deliberately selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the so-called missing ruler is won, the player's profit depends on whether or not the selection order information is notified. It does not fluctuate. As a result, restrictions on notifying the selection order information are unlikely to occur.

Features J12. The plurality of variable display units include a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R).
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the order selection means does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

According to the feature J12, since the player generally stops the left variable display unit first, the correct answer order event occurs by chance by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit. It is possible to reduce the possibility of doing so.

Feature J13. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the defined combination is a re-gaming combination.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned action and effect by utilizing the replaying combination.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A first control means (main side MPU 72) and a second control means (sub side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means are provided.
The second control means
A notification control means (in the sub-side MPU 82) that enables notification to be given to the player in each of the first advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) and the second advantageous gaming state (normal AT state). (Function to execute the processes of steps S1109 and S1806) and
A second-side termination means (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) that terminates the second advantageous gaming state when the end condition of the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied.
With
The first control means provides a first-side termination means (a function of executing the process of step S1009 in the main MPU 72) to terminate the first advantageous gaming state when the ending condition of the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the feature K1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In addition, since the second control means is used to notify the player in each of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is diversified. The processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

In this case, the determination of the end trigger of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state is not all made by the second control means, but the determination of the end trigger of the first advantageous gaming state is made by the first control means. Will be done. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a special process in the first control means according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It will be possible.

From the above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Feature K2. The first control means sets a progress waiting period (end wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game in the game executing means (reel unit 31) according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that (a function of executing the process of step S1011 in the main MPU 72) is provided.

According to the feature K2, the progress waiting period is set according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state, so that the progress of the first advantageous gaming state is given to the player through the setting of the progress waiting period. It is possible to make the player aware of the situation.

Feature K3. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the progress waiting setting means waits for the progress of the game by setting the progress waiting period according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature K3, the progress of the game is waited by setting the progress waiting period according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, the player feels that the progress of the game is waiting, and by grasping that the progress waiting period is set, it is possible to grasp the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. Become.

Features K4. The progress waiting setting means causes the measurement of the progress waiting period to start after the variable display of the pattern is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the pattern during the progress waiting period.

According to the feature K4, when the progress waiting period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the progress waiting period is set. ..

Feature K5. The game according to feature K4, which comprises means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1109 and S1208 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the progress waiting response effect during the progress waiting period. Machine.

According to the feature K5, it is possible to execute an effect according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature K6. A combination lottery execution means for executing a combination lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Winning correspondence granting means (a function of executing the winning judgment processing in the main MPU 72) that grants the winning correspondence privilege when a prize corresponding to the winning combination occurs in the winning combination lottery process
With
The first control means has at least determined that the response result, which is either the result of the combination lottery process or the result of the winning, is the first response result (first to third special replay combination winning, losing result). As one condition, a function of executing the processes of the first result corresponding transition means (steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state. )
The second control means
Second result correspondence transition means (step S1614 in sub-side MPU 82) to shift the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state on condition that the correspondence result becomes the second correspondence result (normal replay winning combination). (Function to execute the process of step S1617) and
Execution of the event response transition means (processes S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state on the condition that an event different from the response result becomes a response event. Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that

According to the feature K6, the transition pattern is different between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, so that the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, by making the transition pattern of the second advantageous gaming state more complicated than the transition pattern of the first advantageous gaming state, the game is diversified while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible.

Feature K7. The first control means starts a new execution time of the first advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the first continuation condition is satisfied when one execution time of the first advantageous gaming state is completed. The means (the function of executing the process of step S219 in the main MPU 72) is provided.
The second control means starts a new execution time of the second advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the second continuation condition is satisfied when one execution time of the second advantageous gaming state is completed. It is provided with means (a function of setting the pre-branch AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the processes of steps S2909 to S2911).
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the number of patterns in which the second continuation condition is satisfied is larger than the number of patterns in which the first continuation condition is satisfied.

According to the feature K7, by making the establishment pattern of the continuation condition different between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, since the pattern for satisfying the continuation condition for the second advantageous gaming state is larger than the pattern for establishing the continuation condition for the first advantageous gaming state, the game is played while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible to diversify.

Feature K8. The second control means
When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege numerical information (privilege point) is used as the privilege storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84). A storage execution means for storing (a function of executing the processes of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
When the determination is triggered, the privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value. And the function to execute the process of step S2609),
With
Features K1 to K7 characterized in that when the information corresponds to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value by the privilege standard determination means, a new execution round of the second advantageous gaming state is started. The game machine according to any one of.

According to the feature K8, the second advantageous gaming state is continued because the privilege numerical information stored by satisfying the privilege numerical condition in the second advantageous gaming state becomes the information corresponding to the value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. , In the second advantageous gaming state, the player plays the game while expecting that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and also expects that the privilege numerical information corresponds to a value equal to or higher than the privilege standard numerical value. It becomes. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, since the continuation setting of the second advantageous gaming state in relation to the privilege numerical information is performed by the second control means, the interest of the game should be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Feature K9. The second control means is a continuous lottery for whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state after one execution time of the advantageous gaming state is completed when the continuous lottery trigger occurs. A continuous lottery execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the process is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, wherein when a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, a new execution round of the second advantageous gaming state is started.

According to the feature K9, when the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, the second advantageous gaming state is in a row, so the player plays the game while expecting the continuous winning in the second advantageous gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game will be improved. In this case, since the continuation setting of the second advantageous gaming state in relation to the continuous lottery process is performed by the second control means, the interest of the game should be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Feature K10. A combination lottery execution means for executing a combination lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Winning correspondence granting means (a function of executing the winning judgment processing in the main MPU 72) that grants the winning correspondence privilege when a prize corresponding to the winning combination occurs in the winning combination lottery process
With
The first control means performs the remaining execution of the first advantageous gaming state, provided that at least one condition is that the corresponding result, which is either the result of the winning combination lottery process or the result of the winning, is the first corresponding result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, which comprises a number-of-times setting means for setting the number of times (a function of executing the processes of steps S803, S810, and S904 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature K10, since the first advantageous gaming state can be a continuous villa, the player plays the game while expecting the consecutive villa in the first advantageous gaming state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the remaining number of executions of the first advantageous game state is set in relation to the result of the winning combination lottery process or the result of winning, the interest of the game can be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible to plan.

Features K11. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display units for variably displaying a picture, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding variable display unit.
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing the reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
With
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state are described in any one of features K1 to K10, which is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is won. Game machine.

Features In a gaming machine such as the K11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that the player is made to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Further, in a slot machine, it is known that an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided in addition to the reel device to improve the interest of the game through the effect executed by the effect device. Further, in the configuration provided with the effect device in this way, the effect control means is provided separately from the main control means for performing the lottery process and the reel drive control, and the effect control means controls the effect device. Therefore, a configuration aimed at reducing the processing load of the main control means is also known.

Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced by providing a plurality of control means as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display units for variably displaying a picture, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding variable display unit.
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing the reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in
Winning support granting means (winning determination in the main MPU 72) that grants a winning support privilege to a player based on the display of a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Function to execute processing) and
In a game machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, the order-corresponding combination (first bell combination and first bell combination) that enables the generation of the order-corresponding winning when the variable display of the patterns on the plurality of variable display units is stopped in a predetermined order. 2 bell role) exists,
A first control means (main side MPU 72) having the combination lottery execution means and the variable display control means,
A second control means (sub-side MPU 82) that executes notification control so that the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is won in the advantageous gaming state (normal AT state).
With
The first control means
Winning identification means (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main MPU 72) for specifying whether or not the order-corresponding winning has occurred when the order-corresponding combination is won, and
A first setting means for setting an external output indicating that the game is in an advantageous gaming state, based on the fact that the order-corresponding winning combination has been identified by the winning-identifying means when the order-corresponding combination is won. (Function to execute the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. Further, since the notification control in the predetermined order in the advantageous gaming state is performed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in the configuration aimed at improving the interest of the game by setting the advantageous gaming state. Be done.

In this case, the first control means sets an external output indicating that the game is in an advantageous gaming state when it is specified that an order-corresponding prize has occurred when the order-corresponding combination is won. As a result, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is achieved without requiring the transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to set an external output to indicate that.

From the above, it is possible to preferably perform external output.

Feature L2. The first setting means is an external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is obtained when the occurrence of the order-corresponding winning occurs a specific number of times specified by the winning specifying means as a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to the feature L1, which is characterized in that the above-mentioned game is performed.

According to the feature L2, the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the gaming state is advantageous when the order-corresponding winning is accidentally generated is reduced.

Feature L3. In the first setting means, the number of times that the order-corresponding winning is specified by the winning specifying means is a plurality of times without the order-corresponding winning being specified by the winning specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein an external output setting is performed to indicate that the game is in the advantageous gaming state when a specific number of times is generated.

According to the feature L3, the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the game is in an advantageous gaming state is performed when the order-corresponding winning is accidentally generated is reduced.

Feature L4. The plurality of variable display units include a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R).
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the predetermined order does not include an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

According to the feature L4, since the player generally stops the left variable display unit first, the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit is not included as a predetermined order, so that the order-corresponding prize happens by chance. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

Feature L5. Disadvantages that cause an event that is disadvantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit different from the left variable display unit is first stopped in the predetermined gaming state that is not the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature L4, which comprises setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S1408 and step S1411 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature L5, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the order-corresponding prize is accidentally generated in the predetermined gaming state.

Feature L6. The first control means externally indicates that the first control means is not in the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the order-corresponding winning combination did not occur when the order-corresponding combination was won. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that it includes a second setting means for setting an output (a function of executing the process of step S3107 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature L6, whether or not the order-corresponding prize has occurred in both the case where the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state is set and the case where the external output setting indicating the non-advantageous gaming state is set. Should be monitored. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L7. The first setting means sets an external output indicating that the advantageous gaming state is obtained when the number of times that the order-corresponding winning is generated is the first specific number of times specified by the winning specifying means. And
The second setting means sets an external output indicating that the advantageous gaming state is not obtained when the number of times that the order-corresponding winning is not generated is the second specific number of times specified by the winning specifying means. To do,
The gaming machine according to feature L6, wherein the first specific number of times and the second specific number of times are different.

According to the feature L7, it is monitored whether or not the order-corresponding winning is generated in both the case where the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state is set and the case where the external output setting indicating the non-advantageous gaming state is set. It is possible to set the execution timing and accuracy of the external output setting according to the type of each external output setting.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the first specific number of times is larger than the second specific number of times.

According to the feature L8, it is possible to accurately set the external output indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state while enabling the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state to be set at an early stage.

Feature L9. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein a plurality of combinations are included as the order-corresponding combination.

According to the feature L9, while increasing the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each combination, it is possible to set the external output corresponding to the advantageous gaming state at an early stage.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature L group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that the player is made to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, information is externally output in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the game machine, but it is still improved in performing this external output appropriately. There is room.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A combination lottery execution means for executing a combination lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Winning correspondence granting means (a function of executing the winning judgment processing in the main MPU 72) that grants the winning correspondence privilege when a prize corresponding to the winning combination occurs in the winning combination lottery process
With
As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance combination (CB combination) in which the winning state is maintained until a corresponding prize is generated in the case of winning.
The gaming machine is in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), provided that the winning state of the winning maintenance combination is at least one condition. A gaming machine comprising an advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature M1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state, it is possible to limit the period during which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is possible in relation to the winning combination. Become. As a result, the player pays attention to winning the winning maintenance role and maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance role. From the above, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

In addition, "a pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
With
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated.
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning correspondence privilege as a prize generation when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
Even if the winning maintenance combination is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. " It is possible to generate a prize corresponding to the role and to avoid it, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature M2. When a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination occurs, a non-advantageous transition means (main side) for shifting to a non-advantageous gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is not larger than the number of game media of the player at the start. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the MPU 72 includes a function of executing the processes of steps S704 to S706).

According to the feature M2, when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state, the transition to the non-advantageous gaming state occurs when the winning is generated, while the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs by not generating the winning. there's a possibility that. As a result, it is possible to greatly differ the profits of the player depending on whether or not the winning of the winning maintenance role is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance role.

Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the start.

According to the feature M3, when the winning of the winning maintenance combination is generated, not only the opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state disappears but also the transition to the non-advantageous gaming state is caused. Although it is not expected to increase, there will be no decrease. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player who has unintentionally generated the winning of the winning maintenance role.

Features M4. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
With
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated.
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning correspondence privilege as a prize generation when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature M2 or M3, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games.

According to the feature M4, it is possible to greatly differ the profit of the player depending on whether or not the winning maintenance role is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance role. ..

Feature M5. It is provided with a winning notification means (a function of executing the process of step S707 in the internal state notification unit 63 and the main MPU 72) so that the winning state notification of the winning state of the winning maintenance combination is executed. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a prize when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state.

Feature M6. It is provided with an external setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105, S3404, and S3406 in the main MPU 72) for setting an external output indicating that the gaming state is advantageous.
The winning notification means is such that when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state, the winning state notification is started by the time the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state is set. The gaming machine according to the feature M5.

According to the feature M6, it is possible to notify the player that the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state before notifying the outside of the game machine.

Feature M7. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display units (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a picture, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding variable display unit.
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing the reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in
With
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated.
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning correspondence privilege as a prize generation when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped.
When the winning maintenance combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, the winning notification means wins the winning combination until it becomes possible to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit to be stopped at the end. The gaming machine according to feature M5 or M6, wherein the state notification is to be started.

According to the feature M7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated in the game in which the winning maintenance role is won. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of prizes corresponding to the winning maintenance role.

Feature M8. When the winning maintenance combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, the winning notification means starts the winning state notification before the variable display of the pattern can be stopped in the game. The gaming machine according to the feature M7, which is characterized in that it is to be used.

According to the feature M8, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the variable display of the pattern in the game is started, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role. It becomes possible.

Feature M9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
With
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated.
The winning correspondence granting means grants the winning correspondence privilege as a prize generation when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8.

Features In a gaming machine such as the M9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature M10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature M9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

Features In a gaming machine such as the M10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays a pattern, and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation means is operated, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means in each game, and
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped and the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed, the winning correspondence granting means (winning determination processing in the main MPU 72) that grants the winning correspondence privilege as the winning occurrence occurs. Function to execute) and
When the first transition condition is satisfied, the first transition means (function to execute the processes of steps S704 to S706 in the main MPU 72) to shift to the first gaming state (CB middle state) and
The processing of the second transition means (steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning to the second gaming state (bonus AT state) when the second transition condition is satisfied. Function to execute) and
When a predetermined number of continuous games are executed in the second game state, the game-corresponding end means (processes S1007 to S1012 in the main MPU 72) for ending one execution of the second game state is executed. Function) and
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, the priority means for giving priority to the game content in the first gaming state ( (Function to execute the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72) and
The game number management means (process of step S1005 in the main MPU 72) that treats the game portion executed under the situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means as the digested portion of the predetermined continuous game number. Function to execute) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature N1, when the first transition condition is satisfied in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, the game content in the first gaming state is prioritized. In this case, instead of completely stopping the progress to the second game state, the number of games executed under the situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized is the predetermined number of continuous games in the second game state. Treated as digested. As a result, the player can prevent the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state, for example, or expect that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state, for example. In the second gaming state, it is intentionally shifted to the first gaming state, or for example, in the second gaming state, it is expected that the first gaming state is intentionally shifted. From the above, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

It should be noted that the configuration that "the first game state is a game state that continues over a plurality of games" may be applied.

Feature N2. The second transition means shifts to the second game state after the end condition of the first game state is satisfied in a situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means. It is provided with a transition means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1103 and step S1104 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the process of step S1106).
In the second game state in which the game-corresponding end means is shifted by the shift control of the shift means after the end, when the remaining number of games of the predetermined continuous game number when the shift control occurs is exhausted. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that the execution times are terminated.

According to the feature N2, when the game transitions to the first gaming state in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is reached after the end of the first gaming state. Even so, the second game state ends when the remaining predetermined number of continuous games after the number of games executed in the first game state is subtracted is exhausted. As a result, it is possible to correlate the first game state and the second game state with each other as compared with the configuration in which the transition of the second game state is simply invalidated, and it is possible to provide a novel game content. Become.

Feature N3. The post-end transition means is the winning state of the winning maintenance combination after the end condition of the first game state is satisfied in a situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means. The gaming machine according to feature N2, characterized in that the player shifts to the second gaming state when the situation is reached.

According to the feature N3, the second game state is not started immediately after the end of the first game state, but the second game state is not started until the winning state of the winning maintenance combination is reached. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second gaming state pays attention to whether or not he / she wins the winning maintenance role after the end of the first gaming state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature N4. The game number management means is the winning state of the winning maintenance combination after the end condition of the first game state is satisfied in a situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the game portion executed up to the point is treated as the digested portion of the predetermined number of continuous games.

According to the feature N4, the game portion required to reach the winning state of the winning maintenance combination after the end of the first gaming state is treated as the digested portion of the predetermined number of continuous games in the second gaming state. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second game state expects to win the winning maintenance role by the time the game is digested for the predetermined number of continuous games after the end of the first game state. The game will be played, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the feature N5, the player prevents the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state, or expects that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the second game state is improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is not larger than the number of game media of the player at the start.

According to the feature N6, the profit of the player is greatly different depending on whether or not the transition to the first gaming state occurs in the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the second game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to feature N6, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the start.

According to the feature N7, in the first game state, the game medium is not expected to increase, but the decrease does not occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player when the transition to the first gaming state occurs.

Feature N8. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
As a combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (first bell combination and second bell combination) that enable the generation of winning when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

According to the feature N8, in the second gaming state, the predetermined order is notified, so that the gaming state is advantageous for the player.

Feature N9. As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance combination (CB combination) in which the winning state is maintained until a corresponding prize is generated in the case of winning.
The first transition condition is that a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination is generated.
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, wherein the second transition condition is satisfied with at least one condition of being in the winning state of the winning maintenance combination.

According to the feature N9, it is possible to generate the transition to the second gaming state by maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance combination, and when the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance combination is generated, it is the second gaming state. Even if the game shifts to the first game state, the number of games digested in the first game state is subtracted from the predetermined number of continuous games. As a result, it is possible to greatly change the progress of the subsequent game depending on whether or not a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance role. Become.

It should be noted that the operation of the stop operation means can be performed by applying the configuration that "even if the winning maintenance combination is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means". Depending on the mode, it is possible to generate a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role and to avoid it, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature N10. The second gaming state has a higher advantage for the player than the first gaming state.
It is provided with a winning notification means (a function of executing the process of step S707 in the internal state notification unit 63 and the main MPU 72) so that the winning state notification of the winning state of the winning maintenance combination is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature N9.

According to the feature N10, it is possible to urge the player not to generate a prize when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state.

Feature N11. It is provided with an external setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S3118, step S3408, and step S3703 in the main MPU 72) for setting an external output indicating the second gaming state.
When the winning state of the winning maintenance combination is reached, the winning notification means starts the winning state notification by the time the external output setting indicating the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine according to the feature N10.

According to the feature N11, it is possible to notify the player that the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state before notifying the outside of the game machine.

Feature N12. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display units (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display unit of the pattern.
The variable display control means starts variable display of a pattern on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means is based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display unit corresponding to the above is stopped.
When the winning maintenance combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, the winning notification means starts the winning state notification by the time the variable display of the pattern on all the variable display units is stopped. The gaming machine according to the feature N10 or N11, which is characterized in that the game is to be played.

According to the feature N12, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated in the game in which the winning maintenance role is won. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of prizes corresponding to the winning maintenance role.

Feature N13. The winning notification means causes the winning status notification to be started before the variable display of the pattern is started in the game when the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning combination lottery process. The gaming machine according to the feature N12, which is characterized by being.

According to the feature N13, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the variable display of the pattern in the game is started, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features N1 to N13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features M1 to M10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature M group and the feature N group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that the player is made to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the situation where the medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to provide a novel game content, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating body type game machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives special benefits to players.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 63 ... Internal status notification unit, 66 ... Image display device, 67 ... Bonus point notification unit, 68 ... Stock notification unit, 69 ... Win number notification unit, 70 ... Main control device, 72 ... Main side MPU, 73 ... Main side ROM, 74 ... Main side RAM, 80 ... Sub control device, 82 ... Sub side MPU, 83 ... Sub-side ROM, 84 ... Sub-side RAM.

Claims (2)

The role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process,
Winning correspondence granting means for granting winning correspondence privilege corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process,
A transition lottery execution means for executing a transition lottery process when a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process in the pre-transition state, and
An advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state when the transition is won in the transition lottery process.
A means for increasing the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process, provided that at least one condition is that the winning combination is won in the combination lottery process in the pre-transition state.
With
The separate combination does not serve as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but serves as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in other gaming states .
The predetermined combination serves as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but does not serve as a trigger for granting the advantageous gaming state in other gaming states.
A gaming machine characterized in that, at least in the pre-transition state, the probability of winning the predetermined combination is higher than the probability of winning the other combination. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game is performed using a gaming medium.

Images